PC Software
RCM-101-MW, RCM-101-USB
Operation Manual
Twenty-ninth Edition
IAI Corporation
Please Read Before Use
Thank you for purchasing our product.
This Operation Manual explains the handling methods, structure and maintenance of this product, among others,
providing the information you need to know to use the product safely.
Before using the product, be sure to read this manual and fully understand the contents explained herein to
ensure safe use of the product.
The DVD that comes with the product contains operation manuals for IAI products.
When using the product, refer to the necessary portions of the applicable operation manual by printing them out
or displaying them on a PC.
After reading the Operation Manual, keep it in a convenient place so that whoever is handling this product can
reference it quickly when necessary.
[Important]






This Operation Manual is original.
The product cannot be operated in any way unless expressly specified in this Operation Manual. IAI
shall assume no responsibility for the outcome of any operation not specified herein.
Information contained in this Operation Manual is subject to change without notice for the purpose of
product improvement.
If you have any question or comment regarding the content of this manual, please contact the IAI
sales office near you.
Using or copying all or part of this Operation Manual without permission is prohibited.
The company names, names of products and trademarks of each company shown in the sentences
are registered trademarks.
CAUTION
Disconnection of the Teaching Pendant from the PCON, ACON, DCON,
SCON ERC2, ERC3, ROBONET, PSEP, ASEP, DSEP, MSEP, MSCON,
MCON Controller and ELECYLINDER
* After disconnecting the Teaching Pendant from the PCON, ACON, DCON, SCON, ROBONET, MSEP,
MSCON or MCON controller with the AUTO/MANU switch, always turn the AUTO/MANU switch to AUTO.
* For the PCON, ACON, ERC2, ERC3, PSEP, ASEP, DSEP controller and ELECYLINDER without AUTO/MANU
switch, always set the MANU operation mode to “Monitor Mode 2” on the main window before disconnecting
the Teaching Pendant from the controller. (Refer to 3.2, “Operations Using the Toolbar Buttons.”)
(Note)
When connected to the controller without AUTO/MANU switch, the conditions shown below occur.
When the controller is set by connecting the Teaching Pendant to the gateway unit/SIO converter, the
conditions shown below occur.
● If the Teaching Pendant is disconnected while the setting of “Teach 1”or “Teach 2” remains, I/O
will become invalid and control from PLC will become impossible.
● If the Teaching Pendant is disconnected while the setting of “Monitor 1” remains, the maximum
speed will become the safety speed set for the parameter regardless of a command from PLC.
Software License Agreement
Before opening this product, read the software license agreement (hereinafter referred to as “Agreement”).
This Agreement applies to the PC software that comes with this product (hereinafter referred to “Software”).
By using this software, you are deemed to have agreed to the terms of this Agreement. You may not use this
software if you do not agree to the terms of this Agreement.
If you do not agree to the terms of this Agreement, please return your product in the original, unused condition,
and IAI will refund the price you paid for the product.
IAI Corporation (hereinafter referred to as “IAI”) shall grant to the user (hereinafter referred to as “the User”), and
the User shall accept, a non-transferable, non-exclusive right to use the software program supplied with this
Agreement (hereinafter referred to as “the Licensed Software”), based on the following terms and conditions.
Witnesseth
1. Term of Agreement
This Agreement shall take effect when the User opens this software and remain effective and in force until this
Agreement is terminated upon a written request made by the User to IAI or pursuant to the provision of Section 3.
2. Right of Use
The User may use this software on a computer on the condition that an external equipment communication cable
manufactured and sold by IAI (hereinafter referred to as “Dedicated Connection Cable”) is used. The User or a
third party may use this software on multiple computers on the condition of using dedicated connection cables.
3. Termination of Agreement
If the User violates any of the provisions specified in this Agreement or any material reason arises that makes
continuation of this Agreement difficult, IAI may terminate this Agreement immediately without serving any notice.
If this Agreement is terminated, the User shall destroy this software, dedicated connection cable or cables, and all
copies of this software, within ten (10) days from the date of termination of this Agreement.
4. Scope of Protection
IAI may change any and all specifications regarding this software without prior notice. IAI shall also provide no
warranty in connection with this software.
Neither the User nor any third party may demand compensation for any loss suffered by the User or third party as
a result of use of this software by the User or third party.
Supported Models
The PC software RCM-101-MW and RCM-101-USB supports the following controller models of the specified
versions and later.
Model Name
Table 1 List of Supported Models
Initial Supported Version
Model Name
Initial Supported Version
RCP *1
V1.00.00.00
MSCON
V9.02.00.00
RCS *1
V3.00.00.00
MSEP (with 3D or T included
in model code) *3
V9.06.00.00
E-Con *1
V3.00.05.00
SCON-CAL/CGAL
V9.07.00.00
RCP2 *1
V4.00.00.00
ACON-CB
V10.00.00.00
ERC *1
V4.00.00.00
DCON-CB
V10.00.00.00
ERC2
V6.00.00.00
SCON-CB
V10.00.00.00
ERC3
V8.03.00.00
MCON
V10.00.00.00
PCON (other than
PCON-CA, PCON-CB,
CYB, PLB, POB)
V6.00.00.00
PCON-CB
V10.02.00.00
PCON-CA
V8.03.00.00
RCP6S
V10.02.00.00
ACON (other than
ACON-CA, ACON-CB,
CYB, PLB, POB)
V6.00.00.00
RCM-P6PC
V12.00.00.00
RCM-P6AC
V12.00.00.00
ACON-CA
V9.05.00.00
RCM-P6DC
V12.00.00.00
DCON-CA
V9.05.00.00
PCON-CB, CYB, PLB, POB
V10.03.00.00
SCON-C
V6.00.00.00
ACON-CB, CYB, PLB, POB
V10.03.00.00
SCON-CA
V8.00.00.00
DCON-CB, CYB, PLB, POB
V10.03.00.00
ROBONET
V6.00.04.00
ASEP *2
V7.00.00.00
PSEP *2
V7.00.00.00
V10.04.00.00
DSEP *2
V8.04.00.00
MCON
(MECHATROLINK-Ⅲ: with
ML3 included in model code)
(SSCNETⅢ/H: with SSC
included in model code)
(EtherCAT Motion: with ECM
included in model code)
MSEP (without 3D or T
included in model code) *3,
MSEP-LC*3
V9.01.00.00
ELECYLINDER
V12.00.00.00
Model Code of MSEP 3D (3W, Brush-less DC Electric Motor), T (High-thrust Setting Type)
*1: This PC software also supports the RCP, RCS, E-Con, RCP2, and ERC controllers.
(Note) Confirm the connected model and version of this application. If any unsupported model is connected, it
may operate unexpectedly.
(Note) ERC2, ERC3, PCON, ACON, SCON or MSCON cannot be used by linking with any model shown in *1, *2
and *3. Models in *1, *2 and *3 cannot be linked with each other.
The software reset function is effective for models corresponding to V4.00.00.00 or later of the supported version.
A Word of Caution
[1] This software is copyrighted by IAI Corporation (IAI).
[2] The software and the manual can only be used upon the software license agreement.
[3] IAI cannot assume responsibility for any damage or loss resulting from the use of this software or the
manual.
[4] Please note that the version or edition number printed on the face of this manual does not correspond to the
software version number.
[5] The content of this manual is subject to change without notice.
[6] This software runs on Windows shown below. This manual has been written on the assumption that the user
already has a basic understanding of Windows operations.
(However, this software does not contain Windows.)
Port used
RS-232C
USB
Type
RCM-101-MW
RCM-101-USB
Supported Operating Systems
Windows 7 *1, Windows8, 8.1 *2, Windows 10 *3
Windows 7 *1, Windows8, 8.1 *2, Windows 10 *3
*1 Supported by software version V9.00.00.00 or later
*2 Supported by software version V9.08.00.00 or later
*3 Supported by software version V11.00.00.00 or later
Microsoft, MS, MS-DOS, Windows, Windows 98SE, Windows Me, Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Vista,
Windows 7, Windows 8, 8.1 and Windows 10 are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
Copyright© Feb 2012. IAI Corporation. All rights reserved.
Table of Contents
1.
Preparation Before Use.................................................................................................................... 1
1.1 Items Supplied with This Software (Product Components)........................................................... 1
1.2 Operating Environment................................................................................................................. 2
1.3 Installing the Software .................................................................................................................. 3
1.4
1.5
1.3.1 How to Install the PC Interface Software for RC......................................................................... 3
1.3.2 How to Uninstall PC Interface Software for RC .......................................................................... 9
1.3.3 How to Install the USB Conversion Adapter Driver Software ...................................................10
1.3.4 How to Change the IAI USB COM Port.....................................................................................24
Starting the Software ...................................................................................................................26
Setting of communication Window...............................................................................................28
2.
Checking for Connected Axes........................................................................................................ 29
3.
Main Window.................................................................................................................................. 30
3.1 Operating from the Main Menu ....................................................................................................32
3.2 Operations Using the Toolbar Buttons.........................................................................................43
3.3 Tree View ....................................................................................................................................45
3.4 Status Bar....................................................................................................................................46
4.
Selecting an Axis............................................................................................................................ 47
5.
Editing Position Data on CON Controllers and Older Models ........................................................ 48
5.1 Online Mode ................................................................................................................................48
5.2 Offline Mode ................................................................................................................................75
5.2.1
5.2.2
6.
Initial Setting and Position Data Editing for SEP Controllers.......................................................... 79
6.1 Initial Setting ................................................................................................................................79
6.2 Editing Position Data ...................................................................................................................86
6.2.1
6.2.2
7.
Creating New Position Data ......................................................................................................75
Reading a File ...........................................................................................................................77
Online Mode ..............................................................................................................................86
Offline Mode ..............................................................................................................................97
ELECYLINDER Simple Data Setting............................................................................................ 101
7.1 Online Mode ..............................................................................................................................101
7.2 Offline Mode ..............................................................................................................................109
7.2.1
7.2.2
Creating New Position Data ....................................................................................................109
Reading a File .........................................................................................................................109
8.
Editing Parameters....................................................................................................................... 111
9.
Monitoring .................................................................................................................................... 116
9.1 Status Monitor Window..............................................................................................................116
9.2 CTL Alarm List...........................................................................................................................123
9.3 Velocity/Current Monitor Window ..............................................................................................125
9.4 Servo Monitor Window ..............................................................................................................127
9.5 Maintenance information Window..............................................................................................135
9.6 Gateway Data Monitor ...............................................................................................................138
9.7 Network Data Monitor ................................................................................................................141
9.7.1
9.7.2
How to Display Monitoring Window.........................................................................................141
Monitoring Window..................................................................................................................145
10. Setup ............................................................................................................................................ 147
10.1 Setting of application Window....................................................................................................147
10.2 Assigning an Axis Number.........................................................................................................152
10.3 Time Setting ..............................................................................................................................153
10.4 Load Cell Calibration .................................................................................................................155
11. Version Information ...................................................................................................................... 157
12. Smart Tuning Function (Version V8.03.00.00 or Later)................................................................ 158
12.1 Restrictions................................................................................................................................159
12.1.1 Actuator Applicable for Smart Tuning Function ......................................................................159
12.1.2 Parameter Setting ...................................................................................................................159
12.2 Outline of Smart Tuning Function ..............................................................................................159
12.2.1 Setting of maximum acceleration/deceleration speed considering the indicated
carrier load and velocity ..........................................................................................................160
12.2.2 Setting of acceleration/deceleration speed to provide the shortest operation time
figured out from the indicated carrier load and moving distance ............................................160
12.2.3 Overshoot judgment on S motion operation ...........................................................................160
12.2.4 Test run ...................................................................................................................................160
12.2.5 Cycle time calculation .............................................................................................................160
12.3 Operation in Edit position data Window .....................................................................................161
12.3.1 Explanation of Window Screen ...............................................................................................161
12.3.2 Explanation of Each Operation ...............................................................................................165
12.4 Operation on Test Run and Cycle Time Calculation..................................................................176
12.4.1 Outline of Test Run Operation ................................................................................................176
12.4.2 Explanation of Each Window for Test Run Operation.............................................................177
12.4.3 Explanation of Cycle Time Calculation Window......................................................................192
13. Off Board Tuning Function ........................................................................................................... 201
13.1 Restrictions................................................................................................................................202
13.2
13.3
13.4
13.5
13.6
13.1.1 Actuators Applicable for Off Board Tuning Function...............................................................202
13.1.2 Restrictions in Operation.........................................................................................................202
13.1.3 Caution Regarding Gain Set No. 0..........................................................................................202
Guideline of Off Board Tuning Function ....................................................................................203
How to Start up..........................................................................................................................203
Operation to Select Target Axis Number for Off Board Tuning..................................................204
13.4.1 Explanation of Each Item Shown in Window ..........................................................................204
Operation on Off Board Tuning..................................................................................................206
13.5.1 Outline of Operation ................................................................................................................206
13.5.2 Explanations for each Item in Select actuator Window...........................................................207
13.5.3 Explanations for each Item in Carrier load Select Window.....................................................213
13.5.4 Explanations for each Item in Select adjustment method Window .........................................219
13.5.5 Explanations for each Item in Manual Window .......................................................................223
13.5.6 Explanations for each Item in Test run Window......................................................................229
13.5.7 Explanations for each Item in Adjustment record data save Window.....................................237
Operations in Cycle Time calculation ........................................................................................239
13.6.1 Explanations for each Item in Cycle Time calculation Window...............................................239
13.6.2 Test run plan Setting Window .................................................................................................240
13.6.3 Test run result Display Window...............................................................................................244
14. Frequency Analysis for Vibration Control
(Version V8.00.00.00 or later of SCON-CA, Version V9.02.00.00 or later of MSCON, Version
V9.07.00.00 or later for SCON-CAL/CGAL, V10.00.00.00 or later for SCON-CB)....................... 248
14.1 Operation Overview ...................................................................................................................249
14.2 Explanation of Each Window .....................................................................................................251
14.2.1 Measurement Data Selection Window ....................................................................................251
14.2.2 Sampling Window....................................................................................................................254
14.2.3 Analysis Result Display Window .............................................................................................265
14.2.4 Print Setting Window...............................................................................................................269
14.3 Operating Procedure .................................................................................................................275
15. Press Program Editing and Operation of Servo Press (V10.00.00.00 or later for SCON-CB) ..... 280
15.1 Operation Outline ......................................................................................................................280
15.2 Outline of Operation in Each Window........................................................................................282
15.2.1 Press Program Editing Window ..............................................................................................282
15.2.2 Multi Press Program Editing Window......................................................................................289
15.2.3 Press Program Operation / Monitor Window ..........................................................................290
15.3 Servo Press Related in Application Setting Window ...................................................................302
16. Appendix ...................................................................................................................................... 303
16.1 Parameter (Factory Default Setting) Initializing Method ............................................................303
16.2 PC Software Error List ...............................................................................................................305
17. File Extensions ............................................................................................................................. 309
18. Change History ............................................................................................................................ 311
1.
Preparation Before Use
Please check to make sure that the following items are included in your software package.
[1] Operation manual (1)
[2] CD-ROM containing the software*1 (1)
[3] Customer registration card (1)
[4] External connection cables (1)
External connection cables vary depending on the PC interface software type.
The types and external connection cables are shown in the table below.
Type
RCM-101-MW
RS232C conversion unit (RCB-CV-MW): 1 cable
Communication cable (CB-RCA-SIO050): 1 cable
Connection
Configuration
Compatible controller
PCON, etc.
RS232C conversion unit
RCB-CV-MW
Type
RCM-101-USB
Connection
Configuration
External Connection Cable
Communication cable:
CB-RCA-SIO050
External Connection Cable
USB conversion unit (RCB-CV-USB): 1 cable
Communication cable (CB-RCA-SIO050): 1 cable
USB cable (CB-SEL-USB030): 1 cable
USB conversion unit
(RCB-CV-USB)
USB cable
CB-SEL-USB030
Communication cable
CB-RCA-SIO050
*1 ROBONET Gateway Parameter Setting Tool is stored in the CD-ROM.
Refer to ROBONET Operation Manual for the how to use the tool.
1
Compatible controller
PCON, etc.
1. Preparation Before Use
1.1 Items Supplied with This Software (Product Components)
1. Preparation Before Use
1.2 Operating Environment
You need the following environment to run this software.
Applicable operating systems
Model number
Supported operating systems
RCM-101-MW
Windows 7 *1, Windows 8, 8.1 *2, Windows 10 *3
RCM-101-USB
Windows 7 *1, Windows 8, 8.1 *2, Windows 10 *3
*1 Supported by software version V9.00.00.00 or later
*2 Supported by software version V9.08.00.00 or later
Applicable for 32 bit and 64 bit versions of the OS.
*3 Supported by software version V11.00.00.00 or later
Computer
Personal computer running an applicable operating system (Windows)
Keyboard
Keyboard compatible with a personal computer running an applicable
operating system (Windows)
Memory
Enough memory needed to run an applicable operating system
(Windows)
Display
XGA or higher
Pointing device
Mouse and other compatible driver
Memory-medium reading drive
CD-ROM drive
Hard disk
Hard disk with at least 20 MB of free space
(This software must be installed on the hard disk.)
Serial port
RS232C
(compatible with EIA-S74)
An applicable serial port is required if the model number of your PC
software is as follows:
Model number: RCM-101-MW
USB port
An applicable serial port is required if the model number of your PC
software is as follows:
Model number: RCM-101-USB
2
1.3 Installing the Software
1.3.1 How to Install the PC Interface Software for RC
[1] Insert the CD-Rom containing this software into your CD-ROM drive.
[2] The installed data selection window (Fig. 1.1) will be displayed.
Select the version you wish to install from these choices: PC Interface Software for RC (ENG) and
PC Interface Software for RC (EUR). Then click the corresponding button to begin the installation.
(Some items are not indicated depending on the version.)
Fig. 1.1 Installed Data Selection Window
(The displayed window may vary depending on the version or other factor.)
*
What to do when the Installed Data Selection window (Fig. 1.1) does not appear
If the Installed Data Selection window (Fig. 1.1) does not appear after inserting the CD-ROM, follow the
procedure below to display the Installed Data Selection window.
a. Use Explorer, etc., to display a list of folders and files in the CD-ROM.
The window should display the icons shown in Fig. 1.2.
Fig. 1.2 Icons
b. Double-click
appear.
among the icons displayed. The Installed Data Selection window (Fig. 1.1) will
3
1. Preparation Before Use
This software is run from the hard disk. This section explains how to install the software.
1. Preparation Before Use
[3] A previous version install check window (Fig. 1.3) is displayed.
Click Yes if no previous version has been installed.
Click No if any previous version has been installed.
Installation is interrupted, then uninstall using the Program add/remove icon on the control panel.
Fig. 1.3 Previous Version Install Check Window
If the installer still detects that a previous version is installed after you have clicked Yes, the previous
version detection window (Fig. 1.4) appears. If this window appears, uninstall the previous version and
then repeat the installation process from the beginning.
Fig. 1.4 Previous Version Install Check Window
* How to uninstall is described at the end of how to install PC Interface Software for RC. Refer to it.
4
Fig. 1.5 Installation Window
[5] Customer information register window (Fig. 1.6) is displayed. Enter customer information and click
Next.
Fig. 1.6 Customer Information Registration
5
1. Preparation Before Use
[4] The installation window (Fig. 1.5) for PC Interface Software for RC
Click Next.
1. Preparation Before Use
[6] Specify a destination folder to install the PC interface software for RC. (Fig. 1.7)
Normally, you can install it to the default location.
After specifying it, click Next.
Fig. 1.7 Specification of Destination Folder
[7] The wizard is ready to begin installation. Clicking Install will begin actual installation.
Fig. 1.8 Installation Preparation
6
The window shown in Fig. 1.9 will be displayed during installation.
1. Preparation Before Use
Fig. 1.9 Installation Progress
[8] When installation is completed, the window shown in Fig. 1.10 will be displayed.
Fig. 1.10 Installation Completion
7
1. Preparation Before Use
[9] When the install program is ended, a shortcut in Program  IAI  ROBO Cylinder  PC Interface
Software for RC is displayed on the start menu. This software starts by selecting this item.
[10] Remove the CD-ROM.
* If install is completed with the previous version installed, two shortcuts may be located in Program  IAI 
ROBO Cylinder on the start menu. In this case, only the short cut corresponding to the present version is
deleted when uninstalled. Right click the shortcut for the previous version (PC Interface software for
RC&E-Con) click Delete to manually delete it.
Fig. 1.11 Shortcut Delete Window for Previous Version
8
1.3.2 How to Uninstall PC Interface Software for RC
[2] Select RcPc on the application add and delete window, and click Change/Remove.
Fig. 1.12 Application Add and Delete
[3] When a file delete check window (Fig. 1.13) is displayed, click Yes.
Fig. 1.13 File Delete Check
9
1. Preparation Before Use
[1] Open the application add and delete window on the control panel.
1. Preparation Before Use
1.3.3 How to Install the USB Conversion Adapter Driver Software
When a USB port is used, it is required to install USB conversion adapter driver software.
[Compatible software]
 RCM-101-USB (with USB conversion adaptor + cable)
(1) Windows XP and Windows 2000
For Windows XP and Windows 2000 follow the steps below to install the software.
[For how to install in Windows 7 and Windows Vista, refer to (2) Windows Vista.]
(Note) PC software version V9.08.00.00 or later is not applicable for Windows 2000.
[1] Insert the CD-ROM of this software into your CD-ROM drive.
[2] The installed data selection window (Fig. 1.14) will be displayed.
Click [USB conversion adapter].
Fig. 1.14 Installed Data Selection Window
(The displayed window may vary depending on the version, data in the CD or other factors.)
10
Fig. 1.15 Window to Specify Folder of Copy Destination
Fig. 1.16 Browse for Folder Window
[4] When the folder of IAI USB (copy data) already exists in the copy destination, you are prompted to
overwrite it.
Click OK to overwrite it, or click Cancel to stop copying.
Fig. 1.17 Overwrite Confirmation Window
[5] The complete window (Fig. 1.18) will be displayed.
Fig. 1.18 Complete Window
11
1. Preparation Before Use
[3] You are prompted to set the folder of the copy destination. If you use the displayed folder as it is, click
Copy. To change it, enter it manually or click Browse to set the folder of the copy destination.
On the browse for folder window (Fig. 1.16), click the folder of the copy destination to select it and then
click OK. Once you have clicked OK, the browse for folder window (Fig. 1.16) will disappear and the
selected folder path will be displayed on the window to specify the folder of the copy destination (Fig.
1.15).
1. Preparation Before Use
[6] Once the complete window (Fig. 1.18) has been displayed, click OK. The complete window (Fig. 1.18)
will disappear. Then, click Cancel on the window to specify the folder of the copy destination (Fig.
1.15).
The window to specify the folder of the copy destination (Fig. 1.15) will disappear.
Finally, click Exit on the data selection window (Fig. 1.14). The data selection window (Fig. 1.14) will
disappear.
[7] Remove the CD-ROM.
[8] Then, insert the USB conversion adapter (RCB-CV-USB) into the USB port of your PC.
[9] Windows will open the Found New Hardware Wizard.
Click Next.
Fig. 1.19 Found New Hardware Wizard Start Window
12
Fig. 1.20 Driver Search Select Window
[11]The locate driver files window will open.
Select Specify a location.
Click Next.
Fig. 1.21 Specify the Locate Driver Files Window
13
1. Preparation Before Use
[10] The driver search select window will open.
Check the Search for a suitable driver for my device (recommended).
Click Next.
1. Preparation Before Use
[12] The “Copy manufacturer’s files from:” window will open.
Click Browse and find K: \IAI USB (the folder you have specified in [3] of 1.3.3) and set it.
Click OK.
Fig. 1.22 Specify the Copy Manufacturer’s Files from Window
[13] The driver files search results window will open.
Click Next.
Fig. 1.23 Driver Files Search Results Window
14
Fig. 1.24 IAI USB Composite Device Installation Finish Window
[15] Subsequently, the found new hardware wizard window will open.
Click Next.
Fig. 1.25 Found New Hardware Wizard Window
15
1. Preparation Before Use
[14] When the IAI USB Composite Device driver installation finish is displayed, the installation of the driver
is completed.
Click Finish.
1. Preparation Before Use
[16] The install hardware device drivers window will open.
Select the Search for a suitable driver for my device recommended.
Click Next.
Fig. 1.26 Driver Search Select Window
[17] The locate driver files window will open.
Select Specify a location.
Click Next.
Fig. 1.27 Locate Driver Files Window
16
Fig. 1.28 Specify the Copy Manufacturer’s Files from Window
[19] The driver files search results window will open.
Click Next.
Fig. 1.29 Driver Files Search Results Window
17
1. Preparation Before Use
[18] The copy manufacturer’s files from window will open.
Click Browse and find K:\IAI USB (the folder you have specified in [3] of 1.3.3) and set it.
Click OK.
1. Preparation Before Use
[20] When the IAI USB to UART Bridge Controller driver installation finish window is displayed, the driver
installation is completed.
Click Finish.
Fig. 1.30 IAI USB to UART Bridge Controller Installation Finish Window
[21] The installation of all drivers is completed.
18
Fig. 1.31 Device Manager Window
19
1. Preparation Before Use
[22] Click Start on the Windows taskbar, Settings, and then Control Panel to open the Control Panel.
Double-click System to open System Properties.
Click the Hardware tab in System.
Click Device Manager in Hardware.
Double-click Ports (COM & LPT) in Device Manager to expand the folder tree.
If there is IAI USB to UART Bridge Controller (COM?) under Ports (COM & LPT) in Device
Manager, the driver has normally been installed and operated.
(Note) The number added to the end of COM? becomes the number of the inserted COM port.
1. Preparation Before Use
(2) Windows 7, Windows Vista, Windows 8, 8.1, Windows 10
For Windows 7, follow the steps below to install the software.
You shall follow the same steps for Windows Vista and Windows 8, 8.1, Windows 10.
[1] Insert the CD-ROM of this software into your CD-ROM drive.
[2] Click on Driver of USB conversion adapter in the window to select what to install.
[3] A previous version install check window is displayed.
Click Yes if no previous version has been installed.
Click No if any previous version has been installed.
Installation is interrupted, then uninstall using the Program add/remove icon on the control panel.
Fig. 1.32 Previous Version Install Check Window
[4] IAI Corporation USB to UART Bridge Controller Driver Installer window appears. Click Next>.
Fig. 1.33 IAI Corporation USB to UART Bridge Controller Driver Installer Window
20
[5] The drivers are now installing... window appears.
1. Preparation Before Use
Fig. 1.34 The drivers are now installing... window
[6] Once the installation is completed, “The drivers were successfully installed on this computer.” is shown on
IAI Corporation USB to UART Bridge Controller Driver Installer window. Click Finish.
Fig. 1.35 IAI Corporation USB to UART Bridge Controller Driver Installer Window
[7] Connect the PC and USB conversion adapter using a USB cable.
[8] Installation of the driver is complete.
If the installation does not complete, follow the instruction from [9].
21
1. Preparation Before Use
[9] Open Device Manager.
Right-click on CP2102 USB to UART Bridge Controller, and then left-click on Update Driver
Software.
Fig. 1.36 Device Manager Window
[10] Update window for the driver software opens. Click on Browse my computer for driver software
button in Update Driver Software window.
Fig. 1.37 Update Driver Software Window
22
C:Program Files\IAI\IAI USBv4\Vista-8
Fig. 1.38 Update Driver Software Window
[12] Driver software update complete (IAI USB to UART Bridge Controller) window opens. Click Close in
the Update Driver Software window.
Fig. 1.39 Update Driver Software Complete (IAI USB to UART Bridge Controller) Window
[13] Installation of the driver is complete.
23
1. Preparation Before Use
[11] Update window for the driver software opens.
In the box circled in Update Driver Software window, input the directory “C:Program Files\IAI\IAI
USBv4\Vista-8”. Click Next>.
1. Preparation Before Use
1.3.4 How to Change the IAI USB COM Port
The COM port set during the installation of the USB conversion adapter driver software can be changed by
following the procedure below:
[1]
Click Start on the Windows taskbar, Settings, and then Control Panel to open the Control Panel.
Double-click System to open System Properties.
Click the Hardware tab in System.
Click Device Manager in Hardware.
Double-click Ports (COM & LPT) in Device Manager to expand the folder tree.
[2]
Double-click IAI USB to UART Bridge Controller (COM?).
(Note) “COM?” indicates the current COM port before change.
IAI USB to UART Bridge
Controller (COM?)
Fig. 1.40 Device Manager Dialog Box
[3]
The IAI USB to UART Bridge Controller (COM?) Properties dialog box appears.
Click Advanced... in the properties dialog box.
Fig. 1.41 Properties Dialog Box
24
[4]
COM Port Number:
Fig. 1.42 COM? Port Advanced Settings Dialog Box
[5]
The COM? Port Advanced Settings dialog box closes.
Click OK in the Properties dialog box (Fig. 1.41), and the COM port will be changed.
[6]
Close the Device Manager dialog box and then open it again. You should now see the new COM port
number.
After confirming the new COM port number, close the Device Manager dialog box and all other dialog
boxes currently open.
25
1. Preparation Before Use
The COM? Port Advanced Settings dialog box appears.
Change the COM port number currently selected under COM Port Number:, to a desired number.
After the COM port number has been changed, click OK.
1. Preparation Before Use
1.4 Starting the Software
[1] Turn off the power to the controller and PC, and connect the controller to the PC using the standard
RS232C cable or USB cable that comes with the software.
[2] Turn on the power to the controller and PC, and start Windows.
[3] If your controller has a port switch, turn the port switch ON before starting this software.
* This software judges whether the mode is online or offline depending on whether the controller and
personal computer are connected or not. A controller equipped with a PORT switch does not operate in
the online mode even if the port switch of the controller is turned ON after this software is started. In this
case, the online mode is turned on by performing [Reconnect] (Refer to 3.1 (5) [2] [Setting of controller]).
[4] A check for connected axis appears and a check for connected axis is started. (Refer to 2. Checking
for Connected Axes).
[In the case of PCON, ACON, DCON, SCON, ERC2, ERC3, ROBONET, ASEP, PSEP,
DSEP, MSEP, MSCON, MCON and ELECYLINDER]
Before the connected axis is checked, the setting of communication window (Fig. 1.45) appears, but only
when the software is started for the first time after its installation. [Refer to 1.5, “Setting of
Communication Window.”]
[5] When a check for the connected axis is completed, the main window is displayed, and at the same
time, a window to select Manual operation mode shown in Fig. 1.43 is displayed.
Select the operation mode according to the purpose and press OK.
Hereinafter, select the operation mode according to the purpose of operation.
Fig. 1.43 Manual Operation Mode Select Window
Select the manual operation mode from the following four choices.
 Teach mode 1 (Safety speed effective/PIO start prohibition)
PIO start prohibition:
Position data and parameter, etc., are allowed to be written in the controller
and actuator operation is commanded by the PC software (I/O ineffective).
Safety speed effective: Maximum speed becomes safety speed (set by a parameter) regardless of
speed designation of position data.
 Teach mode 2 (Safety speed ineffective/ PIO start prohibition)
PIO start prohibition:
Position data and parameter, etc., are allowed to be written in the controller
and actuator operation is commanded by the PC software (I/O ineffective).
Safety speed ineffective: Allows operation at the speed set in the speed designation of the position data
table (safety speed or higher).
26
If a warning of “Baud rate of personal computer is not supported” is given and connection with the
controller cannot be performed, select other baud rate.
・ Click setting of main menu, and select “Application”.
・ Change baud rate on the “Setting of application” window (Fig. 10.1).
● When PCON, ACON, DCON, SCON, MSCON, ERC2, ERC3, MCON and ELECYLINDER are
connected, the operation mode is in “Safety speed effective (with safety limit speed)” when this
software is started. In other words, the maximum speed attained in any position movement operation
performed from the PC software (in the test operation mode) will correspond to the safety speed set
by the applicable parameter. To operate the actuator with speed commands specifying any speed
greater than the safety speed set in the position data table, you must change the operation mode to
“Safety speed ineffective (without safety limit speed).”
For switching between with safety speed and without safety speed, refer to 3.2, “Operations using
toolbar buttons.”
[In the case of RCP, RCS, E-Con, RCP2 and ERC2]
[5] When checking if the connected axis is completed, a warning window is displayed.
When OK is clicked, a main window is displayed.
Fig. 1.44 Warning
27
1. Preparation Before Use
 Monitor mode 1 (Safety speed effective/PIO start permission)
PIO start permission:
Monitoring is only allowed. Position data and parameter, etc., are not allowed
to be written in the controller and actuator operation is not commanded by the
PC Software. Operation command (jog, home return, etc.) cannot be
performed from the PC Interface software.
Safety speed effective: Maximum speed becomes safety speed (set by a parameter) regardless of
speed designation of position data.
 Monitor mode 2 (Safety speed ineffective/PIO start permission)
PIO start permission:
Monitoring is only allowed. Position data and parameter, etc., are not allowed
to be written in the controller and actuator operation is not commanded by the
PC Software. Operation command (jog, home return, etc.) cannot be
performed from the PC Interface software.
Safety speed ineffective: Allows to operate at a speed (safety speed or higher) as commanded from the
PLC.
1. Preparation Before Use
1.5 Setting of communication Window
The “Setting of communication” window (Fig. 1.45) is displayed only at the initial start after the software has
been installed. In this window, setting for communication with the controller is made.
Fig. 1.45 Setting of Communication Window
[1] Port
From the list, select the serial port to be used to communicate with the controller.
[2] Baud rate
From the list, select the baud rate.
* The baud rate selected here is used only in the communication between this application and controller.
It does not affect the communication speed parameters of the controller.
* If baud rate is not supported by the port selected in [1], an error occurs when connection is checked.
[3] Last axis No.
Select the axis number of the last axis to be checked for connection.
* Axes of numbers greater than the value selected here will not be checked for connection. Select an
appropriate axis number after checking the axis numbers of the connected axes.
After setting the above items, click the OK button, then checking for connected axes is performed. (From the
next start, checking for connected axes will be automatically performed by this setting.)
* Contents set here can be changed on the setting of application window (Fig. 10.1).
If the Cancel button is clicked, application is ended without performing checking for connected axes (this
setting of communication window will be displayed again.)
28
2.
Checking for Connected Axes
Fig. 2.1 Check for Connected Axes Window (Checking for Connection)
Fig. 2.2 Check for Connected Axes Window (Connection Check Completed)
Check for connected axes can be cancelled by pressing the [ESC] key. (In this case, offline mode is set.)
 Connecting a controller whose enable function is enabled
If you have connected a controller whose enable function is enabled by the applicable parameter, a window
appears with the message asking if you want to disable the enable function.
If the enable function remains enabled, the servo cannot be turned ON in the teaching mode.
29
2. Checking for Connected Axes
The software checks for connection of all axes up to the axis specified in the Last Axis NO. box of the “Setting
of communication” window (Fig. 1.45) or “Setting of application” window (Fig. 10.1).
After the check, “(Connecting)” will be shown for those axes whose connection has been confirmed, while “-”
will be shown for all other axes.
3.
Main Window
3. Main Window
(1) PCON, ACON, DCON, SCON, ROBONET, ASEP, PSEP, DSEP, MSEP, MSCON, MCON controllers,
ERC2, ERC3 and ELECYLINDER
As shown in Fig. 3.1, the main window consists of main menu, toolbar buttons, tree view and status bar. The
tree view on the left side of the window can be displayed by operation of “Window”  “Tree view” on the menu.
(Initial window: Main menu)
Main menu
Toolbar buttons
Tree view
Fig. 3.1 Main Window (Online Window)
Status bar
Select each item explained in 3.1, “Operating from the Main Menu” or 3.2, “Operations Using the Toolbar
Buttons” from the main menu in the main window (Fig. 3.1) or by clicking the corresponding tool button.
30
(2) RCP, RCS, E-Con, RCP2 controller and ERC
As shown in Fig. 3.2, the main window consists of main menu, toolbar buttons, tree view, and status bar. The
tree view on the left side of the window can be displayed by operation of “Window”  “Tree view” on the menu.
(Initial window: Main menu)
Main menu
Tree view
Fig. 3.2 Main Window (Online Window)
Select each item explained in 3.1, “Operating from the Main Menu” or 3.2, “Operations Using the Toolbar
Buttons” from the main menu in the main window (Fig. 3.2) or by clicking the corresponding tool button.
31
3. Main Window
Toolbar buttons
3.1 Operating from the Main Menu
(1) File
3. Main Window
[1] [New]
Create new position data.
[2] [Open]
Load position data or parameters from a file.
[3] [Close]
Close the active file.
[4] [Send to Controller] (Available in the online mode)
[Position Data]
Write position data in a file to the controller.
[Parameter]
Write parameters in a file to the controller.
[5] [Backup] (Available in the online mode)
[Save from Controller to File]
Save all position data and parameters in the controller to a file.
[Send from File to Controller]
Send all position data and parameters in a file to the controller.
[Backup data print]
Print backup data.
The following menus are added from V8.2.0.0.
[Parameter edit]
Editing is available in the parameter edit window from the backup file.
[Position data edit]
Editing is available in the position data edit from the backup file.
[Batch Backup]
The position parameter data of the axes selected from the connected multiple axes can be stored at once
to the individual file.
[Batch Restore]
The position parameter data of the files exist in the selected folders can be transferred to the controller at once.
[6] [Recently used file]
History of recently read files are displayed, and you can select file name from these to read.
[7] [Exit]
Exit this application.
(2) Position (Available in the online mode)
[1] [Edit/Teach]
Load position data from the controller for editing or use in teaching.
* In the case of pulse sequence mode of PCON-PL/PO, ACON-PL/PO, SCON-C, SCON-CA,
SCON-CB, PCON -CA, PCON-CB, ACON-CA, ACON-CB, DCON-CA, DCON-CB and ERC3 position
data cannot be entered. For this reason the simple program line, teach position button, step move,
play button, etc. are not displayed.
[Refer to 5. “Editing Position Data on CON Controllers and Older Models.”]
[Refer to 6.2. “Editing Position Data.”]
[Refer to 7. “ELECYLINDER Simple Data Setting”]
32
[3] [Print]
Print the position data you are currently editing.
* In the case of pulse sequence mode of PCON-PL/PO, ACON-PL/PO, SCON-C, SCON-CA,
SCON-CB, PCON-CA, PCON-CB, ACON-CA, ACON-CB, DCON-CA, DCON-CB and ERC3 position
data cannot be printed.
(3) Parameter (Available in the online mode)
[1] [Edit]
Load parameters from the controller for editing.
[Refer to 8. “Editing Parameters.”]
[2] [Send to Controller]
Transfer (write) edited parameter to the controller.
[3] [Print]
Print the parameter you are currently editing.
[4] [SEP Controller Setting Information]
In here, shows the details of the initial settings done to SEP controller.
[5] [Control Parameter Setting]
• Smart Tuning
Trial run and cycle time calculation of the smart tuning can be conducted.
[Refer to 12, “Smart Tuning Function (Version V8.03.00.00 or Later).”]
• Offboard Tuning
Offboard tuning can be conducted.
* Only on SCON-CA, SCON-CAL/CGAL, SCON-CB, ACON-CA, ACON-CB, MSCON and MCON (Servo
motor)
[Refer to 13, “Off Board Tuning Function on SCON-CA and MSCON Controller.”]
• Frequency Analysis for Vibration Control
Calculate the vibration frequency of the load whose vibration you want to suppress, and set
appropriate parameters.
* Only on SCON-CA, SCON-CAL/CGAL, SCON-CB, ACON-CA, ACON-CB, MSCON and MCON (Servo
motor)
[Refer to 14, “Frequency Analysis for Vibration Control Function.”]
33
3. Main Window
[2] [Send to Controller]
Transfer (write) edited position data to the controller.
* In the case of pulse sequence mode of PCON-PL/PO, ACON-PL/PO, SCON-C, SCON-CA,
SCON-CB, PCON-CA, PCON-CB, ACON-CA, ACON-CB, DCON-CA, DCON-CB and ERC3 position
data cannot be sent to the controller.
Even when you attempt to send position data to the controller, it is not displayed as a selectable
controller on the “select axis number” window.
3. Main Window
(3) Parameter (Available in the online mode) (Continuation)
[6] [SCON Parameter File Converter Tool]
* Software Version 11.00.02.00 and later
The following SCON controller parameter files (converting source files) can be changed into
the converted files.
The extension of converted files will have $$, not like an extension created in a PC software.
Converting Source File
Parameter file (.prsc) for SCON-C
Parameter file (.prsc) for SCON-C
Converted File
Parameter file (.$$prsa) for SCON-CA
Parameter file (.$$prsb) for SCON-CB
Parameter file (.prsa) for SCON-CA
Parameter file (.$$prsb) for SCON-CB
Parameter file (.$$prsa) for SCON-CA
Parameter file (.$$prsb) for SCON-CB
Parameter file (.prsam) for
SCON-CA (MECHATROLINK-Ⅲ:
with ML3 included in model code)
Parameter file (.$$prsbm) for
SCON-CB (MECHATROLINK-Ⅲ:
with ML3 included in model code)
The converted files can be transferred to the following controllers.
Converted File
Controller Available for Transfer
Parameter file (.$$prsa) for SCON-CA
SCON-CA
Parameter file (.$$prsb) for SCON-CB
SCON-CB
Parameter file (.$$prsbm) for
SCON-CB (MECHATROLINK-Ⅲ:
with ML3 included in model code)
SCON-CB (MECHATROLINK-Ⅲ:
with ML3 included in model code)
[Operation]
1) From the main menu, click Parameter (P), and then select SCON Parameter File Converter Tool (S).
The main window of the parameter converter tool is displayed.
Fig. 3.3 Parameter Converter Tool Main Window
34
3) Convert a File
). As “Save As” dialog box will be displayed, indicate
To convert a file, click the conversion button(
the place and file name to save the file and click “Save” button. A message stating “Conversion
Complete” will be displayed if the conversion finishes with no problem, and the file name that was
saved will be shown in the “Converted file name” box.
(Note) For SCON-C parameter files (.prsc), there are two types object to conversion against one
converting source file. In this case, switch the type object to conversion in the file type box
and select the file type for output.
[7]
I/O customize
When selecting PIO pattern 5 (user selection mode) of PCON-CYB, ACON-CYB and DCON-CYB
controllers, set the I/O signal on the “I/O customize” screen.
Select your desired position number from “Number of positioning points” (4 positions, 8 positions, 16
positions, 32 positions and 64 positions). So the following necessary signals, “Command position No.
signal PC*”, “Completion position No. signal PM*”, “Start signal CSTR” and “Positioning complete
signal PEND” are allocated to the I/O (input/output) signals. You can select other signals from the
specified ones.
* Software Version 10.03.00.00 and later
[Operation]
Select [I/O customize], and the “I/O customize” window is displayed.
Allocate the functions to the I/O signals on the I/O Customize window.
to transfer the data to the controller.
After allocating to the I/O signals, click
Position number
Input port
/Output port
setting
Fig. 3.4 I/O Customize Window
35
3. Main Window
(3) Parameter (Available in the online mode) (Continuation)
2) Select Converting Source File
To select a source file for converting, pick a file that you would like to convert and drag and drop in
) and open the folder that the file you would like to
the main window, or click the browse button(
convert is stored and select the file in the “Open File ”dialog box.
The name of the selected file will be shown in the “Source file name” box if the correct file is chosen.
If a file that the parameter converting tool is not applicable to is selected, a message stating “This tool
is not applicable for the selected extension.” will be displayed.
[Number of positioning points]
Select from 4, 8, 16, 32 and 64 points. It is set to 64 points at the delivery.
a) Initial Assignment at Delivery
3. Main Window
Input Side
Output Side
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
b) Select 64 points and one signal can be selected and assigned to each input and output.
Input Side
Output Side
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
←□: Signal selectable
c) Select 32 points and two signals can be selected and assigned to each input and output.
Input Side
Output Side
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
←□: Signal selectable
d) Select 16 points and three signals can be selected and assigned to each input and output.
Input Side
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Output Side
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
←□: Signal selectable
36
e) Select 8 points and four signals can be selected and assigned to each input and output.
Input Side
Output Side
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
←□: Signal selectable
f) Select 4 points and five signals can be selected and assigned to each input and output.
Input Side
Output Side
←□: Signal selectable
[Selection of signal for input port/output port
Select signals optionally from those shown in the tables below.
[For details of signals, refer to the instruction manual of each controller.]
Input
*STP
SON
HOME
RES
JISL
Pause: Turn off to issue pause command
Servo-ON Command: Turn on to turn servo on
Home return: Turn on to issue home-return command
Reset: Turn on to execute reset
Jog/inching switch:
Turn off for JOG operation, on for Inching operation
JVEL
Switchover between JOG velocity / Inching distance:
Turn off to use setting in Parameter No. 26 “JOG Velocity” and
“Parameter No. 48 “Inching Distance”
Turn on to use setting in Parameter No. 47 “JOG Velocity 2” and
“Parameter No. 49 “Inching Distance 2”
JOG+/JOGJOG:
JOG+: Turn on to move opposite home direction
JOG-: Turn on to move to home direction
*The direction to move is opposite for reversed type.
RMOD
Operation Mode:
Turn off for AUTO Mode, on for MANU Mode
BKRL
Brake Control Release: Turn on to release brake
NC
Function is not allocated.
(Note) * in symbols above shows that it is in active low.
37
3. Main Window
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
3. Main Window
Output
MOVE
Moving Signal:
Turns on while actuator in movement
SV
Preparation End:
Turns on when servo turns on
HEND
Home Return Completion:
Turns on when home-return operation completed
*ALM
Alarm: Turns off when alarm issued
ZONE1
Zone 1:
Turns on when current position is in zone setting
ZONE2
Zone 2:
Turns on when current position is in zone setting
PZONE
Position Zone:
Turns on when current position is in position zone setting
*EMGS
Emergency Stop:
Turns off during emergency stop status
RMDS
Operation Mode Status:
Turns off when current status is in AUTO Mode, and on when MANU
Mode
LOAD
Load output judgment:
Turns on when reached and off when not
TRQS
Torque level:
Turns on when reached and off when not
PSFL
Miss-Pressing:
Turns on when miss-pressing occurred
PWR
Controller Standby: Turns on when ready
CM1 to CM8 * All from CM1 to CM8 need to be assigned. Therefore, only four or eight
points can be selected for the number of positioning points.
In PCON-CYB, the current load current is output at intervals of 6.25%.
In ACON-CYB and DCON-CYB, the current load current is output at
intervals of 18.75%.
PUSH
In Pressing Process:
Turns on during pressing operation
GHMS
In Home-Return Process:
Turns on during home-return operation
MEND
Turns on when either of positioning complete or pressing is complete or
miss-pressing, and turns off when movement started
*ALML
Light Malfunction Status:
Turns OFF when light level alarm generated which is possible to continue
operation
*OVLW
Overload Warning Signal:
Turned OFF when the presumed motor temperature exceeds the set
value, and turned ON when it is below the set value.
*ALMC
Critical Malfunction Status:
Turned OFF when an alarm indicating that continuous operation is not
possible has occurred. (It is necessary to turn on the power again.)
NC
Function is not allocated.
(Note) * in symbols above shows that it is in active low.
38
(4) Monitor (Available in the online mode)
[1] [Status]
You can check the various statuses of each axis (axis status, internal flags and I/O ports).
[Refer to 9.1, “Status Monitor Window.”]
[3] [Velocity/Current]
Display the velocity/current monitor window.
* RCP, RCS and E-Con cannot use this function.
Refer to “Supported Models.”
[Refer to 9.3, “Velocity/Current Monitor Window.”]
[4]
[Servo Monitor]
Display the servo monitor window.
* This window can use this function only with SCON-CA, PCON-CA, ERC3 (Software Version
V8.03.00.00 or later) and SCON-CB, ACON-CA, ACON-CB, DCON-CA, DCON-CB, PCON-CB,
MSCON, MCON controllers.
[Refer to 9.4, “Servo Monitor Window.”]
[5]
[Maintenance Information]
Display the maintenance information window.
* This window is available only with SCON-CA, PCON-CA, ERC3 (Software Version V8.03.00.00 or
later) and SCON-CB, ACON-CA, ACON-CB, DCON-CA, DCON-CB, PCON-CB, MSCON, MCON,
SCON-CAL/CGAL, ELECYLINDER controllers.
[Refer to 9.5, “Maintenance Information Window.”]
[6]
[Gateway Data Monitor]
Driving source current consumption can be monitored.
* It can be displayed only on RCP6S Gateway Unit.
[Refer to 9.6 Gateway Data Monitor]
[7]
[Network Data Monitor]
Data received by the host PLC and the fieldbus can be monitored.
* This feature is not applicable for the controllers in following types.
• Motion type fieldbus such as MECHATROLINK-Ⅲ
• Multiple-axis controllers : MCON-C/CG, MSEP-C, MSCON-C
• Controllers with PLC features : MCON-LC/LCG, MSEP-LC, SCON-LC/PCG
[Refer to 9.7 Network Data Monitor]
39
3. Main Window
[2] [CTL Alarm List]
Display the CTL alarm list window.
[Refer to 9.2, “CTL Alarm List.”]
(5) Setup
3. Main Window
[1] [Application Setup]
Set up the application (baud rate and ports).
[Refer to 10.1, “Setting of application Window.”]
[Controller Other than ASEP, PSEP, DSEP and MSEP]
You can separately change the system passwords needed to open the position data edit window and
parameter setting window. Note that if the password for the position data edit window is “0000” (factory-set
password), you need not enter any password to open the position data edit window.
[Refer to 5. “Editing Position Data on CON Controllers and Older Models.”]
[ASEP, PSEP, DSEP and MSEP Controller]
You can change the passwords needed to open the parameter setting window and initial setting window.
With ASEP, PSEP, DSEP and MSEP controllers, the password for the position data edit window is set by
parameter No. 20. Note that if the password for the position data edit window is “0000” (factory-set
password), you need not enter any password to open the position data edit window.
[Refer to 6.1. “Initial Setting.”, 6.2. “Editing Position Data.”]
40
(5) Setup (Continuation)
[2] [Controller Setup]
[Reconnect]: Reconnect the axes.
If the software connects to multiple controllers linked by controller link cables, always select Reconnect
after cycling power to a connected controller to which the teaching pendant is not connected directly.
: Cuts the communication with all the connected axes.
: Available only for types not equipped with axis number setup rotary SW.
The last axis number will be the axis number set for the last axis
number* on the setting of application window.
[Refer to 10.2, “Assigning an Axis Number.”]
[Reset Software]
: Reset (restart) the software.
* RCP, RCS and E-Con cannot reset the software.
[Initial Setting for SEP Controller] : Select the operation pattern of your SEP controller (from PIO patterns
0 to 6) and set the operation mode (single-solenoid, double-solenoid,
etc.), among others.
[Refer to 6.1, “Initial Setting.”]
[Time Setting]
: Set the time for SCON-CA, SCON-CAL/CGAL, SCON-CB, PCON-CA,
PCON-CB, ACON-CA, ACON-CB, DCON-CA, DCON-CB and ERC3
PIO Converter.
*The time for SCON-CA, PCON-CA and ERC3 PIO Converter
(Software Version 8.03.00.00 or later) can be set.
[Refer to 10.3, “Time Setting.”]
[Load Cell Calibration]
: Perform the load cell calibration on actuator equipped with load cell.
[Refer to 10.4, “Load Cell Calibration.”]
[Actuator Replacement]
: Reset the counter to 0 for the total travel times and total driving
distance [km] in the maintenance information. Input the password
5119 and press OK.
[FAN Replacement]
: Reset the counter to 0 for the total fan driving time [days] in the
maintenance information. Input the password 5119 and press OK.
[All Press Program Initialization] : Initialize all the press programs.
[Load Cell Inactivation]
: Use this when required to inactivate the load cell in such a case as in
alarm occurrence.
In order to activate it again after made invalid, have a reboot by
conducting such as software reset. It will be activated again.
[Pairing I.D. Clear]
: The pairing I.D. of the controller applicable for the battery-less
absolute encoder is to be cleared.
Input the password 5119 and press OK.
(Note) When the motor of the actuator is replaced, do not clear the
pairing I.D., but make sure to conduct the home-return
operation.
Without the home-return operation being conducted, the home
position will not be established.
41
3. Main Window
[Disconnect]
[Assign Axis Number]
(6) Window
3. Main Window
[1] [Cascade]
Rearrange all open windows in such a way that they are cascaded (staggered) on top of each other.
[2] [Tile Vertical]
Rearranges all open windows as vertical tiles.
[3] [Tile Horizontal]
Rearranges all open windows as horizontal tiles.
[4] [Arrange Icons]
Arrange all window icons (minimized windows).
[5] [Minimize All]
Minimize all open windows.
[6] [Maximize All]
Restore all window icons (minimized windows) to their original size.
[7] [Close All]
Close all the windows that are open.
[8] [Tree View]
Show/hide the tree view (Fig. 3.7).
[9] [Font size]
Change font size on the position data edit window (Fig. 5.5, Fig. 5.6, Fig. 6.12) and the parameter edit
window (Fig. 8.7), etc.
Select font size from largest, large, medium, small and smallest.
(7) Help
[1] [Help]
Display the help file.
[2] [Version Information]
Display the version information of this application.
[Refer to 11, “Version Information.”]
* The menu items shown in gray cannot be selected.
42
3.2 Operations Using the Toolbar Buttons
[1] [2] [3] [4][5][6][7] [8][9][10][11]
[1] New position data
Same as clicking File, pointing to New, and then selecting Position Data.
[2] Open file
Same as clicking File, and then selecting Open.
[3] Edit/teach position data
Same as clicking Position, and then selecting Edit/Teach.
* In the case of pulse sequence mode of PCON-PL/PO, ACON-PL/PO, SCON-C, SCON-CA, SCON-CB,
PCON-CA, PCON-CB, ACON-CA, ACON-CB, DCON-CA, DCON-CB and ERC3 position data cannot
be entered. For this reason, the JOG window (Fig. 5.7) in which the position input part, tool buttons and
simple program are not displayed is displayed.
(Note) You cannot open the position data edit window and parameter edit window at the same time.
[4] Edit parameters
Same as clicking Parameter, and then selecting Edit.
[5] Monitor
Same as clicking Monitor, and then selecting Status.
[6] CTL alarm list
Display the CTL alarm list window.
Same as clicking Monitor, and then selecting CTL Alarm List.
Content of CTL alarm list is stored by battery backup.
Even if power is turned off, content of controller alarm list is not erased.
(ERC2, ERC3, SCON, ACON, PCON, DCON, ASEP, PSEP, DSEP, MSEP, ROBONET, MSCON, MCON
and ELECYLINDER)
[7] Display the current/velocity current/velocity monitor window.
Same as clicking Monitor, and then selecting Velocity/Current.
* RCP, RCS and E-Con cannot use this function.
Refer to “Supported Functions.”
[8] Reconnect
Same as clicking Setup, pointing to Controller Setup, and then selecting Reconnect.
[9] Disconnect
Same as clicking Setup, pointing to Controller, and then selecting Disconnect.
[10] Save all data
Same as clicking File, pointing to Backup, and then selecting Save from Controller to File.
[11] Send all data
Same as clicking File, pointing to Backup, and then selecting Send from File to Controller.
* The menu items shown in gray cannot be selected.
43
3. Main Window
Fig. 3.5 Toolbar Buttons
3. Main Window
[12][13][14]
[15]
Fig. 3.6 Toolbar Buttons
[12] Cascade windows
Same as clicking Window, and then selecting Cascade.
[13] Tile windows vertically
Same as clicking Window, and then selecting Tile Vertical.
[14] Tile windows horizontally
Same as clicking Window, and then selecting Tile Horizontal.
[15] Select manual operation mode. Select from the following four menus.
* Menus are not displayed in case of RCP, RCS, E-Con, RCP2 controllers and ERC.
 Teach mode 1 (Safety speed effective/PIO start prohibition)
PIO start prohibition:
Position data and parameter, etc., are allowed to be written in the controller
and actuator operation is commanded by the PC software.
Safety speed effective: Maximum speed becomes safety speed (set by a parameter) regardless of
speed designation of position data.
 Teach mode 2 (Safety speed ineffective/ PIO start prohibition)
PIO start prohibition:
Position data and parameter, etc., are allowed to be written in the controller
and actuator operation is commanded by the PC software.
Safety speed ineffective: Allows operation at the speed set in the speed designation of the position data
table (safety speed or higher).
 Monitor mode 1 (Safety speed effective/PIO start permission)
PIO start permission:
Monitoring is only allowed. Position data and parameter, etc., are not allowed
to be written in the controller and actuator operation is not commanded by the
PC Software. Operation command (jog, home return, etc.) cannot be
performed from the PC Interface software.
Safety speed effective: Maximum speed becomes safety speed (set by a parameter) regardless of
speed designation of position data.
 Monitor mode 2 (Safety speed ineffective/PIO start permission)
PIO start permission:
Monitoring is only allowed. Position data and parameter, etc., are not allowed
to be written in the controller and actuator operation is not commanded by the
PC Software. Operation command (jog, home return, etc.) cannot be
performed from the PC Interface software.
Safety speed ineffective: Allows operation at a speed (safety speed or higher) as commanded from the
PLC.
If the controller has an MANU/AUTO switch, the menus become available when the switch is set to the
MANU.
44
3.3 Tree View
From the main menu, click Window, and then select Tree View.
3. Main Window
[1]
*
*
*
[2]
(Note)
Fig. 3.7 Tree View
Axis No. 0 [PCON-CY]
The axis number of each axis and the corresponding controller model are shown.
A light blue icon is shown if the controller is normal. If the controller is in an error state, a red icon is
shown.
The axis name set instead of the axis number can be displayed in Application Setting Window. Also, it
is able to show the axis number and the axis name at the same time.
The controller model name can be shown and hidden.
The time passed since the controller has started up can be shown and hidden.
(Software version V10.00.00.00)
[Refer to 10.1 Setting of Application Window]
Position data
You can double-click this item to open the position data edit window.
* In the case of pulse sequence mode of PCON-PL/PO, ACON-PL/PO, SCON-C, SCON-CA,
SCON-CB, PCON-CA, PCON-CB, ACON-CA, ACON-CB, DCON-CA, DCON-CB and ERC3
position data cannot be entered. For this reason, the JOG window (Fig. 5.7) in which position input
part, tool buttons and simple program line are not displayed is displayed.
You cannot open the position data edit window and parameter edit window at the same time.
[3]
Parameter
You can double-click this item to open the parameter edit window.
[4]
Status monitor
You can double-click this item to open the status monitor window.
[5]
CTL alarm list
You can double-click this item to open the CTL alarm list window.
[6]
Velocity/Current
You can double-click this item to open the velocity/current monitor window.
* The specific tree view will vary depending on the model of the connected controller.
45
3.4 Status Bar
3. Main Window
[1]
[2]
Fig. 3.8 Status Bar
[1] Tool tip
Moving the mouse cursor over a toolbar button will display the tool tip on the button.
[2] Port name
The serial port currently in use is indicated.
[3] Baud rate
The baud rate (bps) of the current communication is indicated.
46
[3]
4.
Selecting an Axis
To perform any of the following operations, select the axis number of the target axis in the “Select axis number”
window (Fig. 4.1).
Before the software switches to the applicable mode in each of the above operations, the “Select axis number”
window appears.
The axis numbers corresponding to the connected axes are shown in the box under Connected axes.
Move the cursor to the axis you want to operate, click to > select the axis, and then click OK. To select all axes,
click >>, and then click OK.
Fig. 4.1 Select Axis Number Window
Note: The axes for which the “Position data edit window” or “Parameter edit window” is currently open in the
online mode are not shown. To select any such axis, close the applicable edit window first.
47
4. Selecting an Axis
[1] Open the position data edit window in the online mode. Refer to 5.1 and 6.2 (Note)
[2] Send position data edited in the offline mode to the controller. Refer to 5.2 and 6.3 (Note)
[3] Open the parameter edit window in the online mode. Refer to 6 (Note)
[4] Send parameters edited in the offline mode to the controller. Refer to 6 (Note)
[5] Collectively save all data from the main window: Refer to 3.1 (Note)
[6] Collectively send all data from the main window: Refer to 3.1 (Note)
[7] Open the status monitor window of the monitor from the main window: Refer to 3.1
[8] Open the CTL alarm list window of the monitor from the main window: Refer to 3.1
[9] Open the velocity/current monitor window of the monitor from the main window: Refer to 3.1
[10] Open the servo monitor window of the monitor from the main window. Refer to 3.1.
[11] Reset the software: Refer to 3.1
[12] Set the time: Refer to 3.1.
[13] Display maintenance information: Refer to 3.1.
5.
Editing Position Data on CON Controllers and Older
Models
Edit position data online or offline on the following controller series:
CON controllers: ERC2, ERC3, PCON, ACON, DCON, SCON, ROBONET, MSCON and MCON
Older models: RCP, RCS, E-Con, RCP2, ERC
5. Editing Position Data on CON Controllers and Older Models
5.1 Online Mode
This mode reads data from the controller to edit.
For ERC2, ERC3, PCON, ACON, DCON, SCON, ROBONET, MSCON and MCON Fig. 5.5 is displayed.
However, for pulse sequence mode of the PCON-PL/PO, ACON-PL/PO, SCON-C, SCON-CA, SCON-CB,
PCON-CA, PCON-CB, ACON-CA, ACON-CB, DCON-CA, DCON-CB and ERC3 controller, position data
cannot be entered.
The JOG window in which the position input part, tool buttons and simple program are not displayed is
displayed. (Fig. 5.7)
For RCP, RCS, E-Con, RCP2 and ERC, Fig. 5.8 is displayed.
in the toolbar.
Click Position and then select Edit/Teach from the main menu, or click
In the select axis number window, select the axis number corresponding to the axis whose position data you
want to edit. Refer to 4, “Selecting an Axis.”
If the password is not “0000,” the input password window appears. Enter the applicable password.
Fig. 5.1 Input Password Window
48
To change the password, perform the operations explained below.
[How to Set Password for Position Data Edit Window]
[1] From the main menu, click Setup and then select Setting of application.
Click the Change Password button.
[2] Select the Position data edit password, and then click the OK button.
Fig. 5.3 Select Password Window
[3] Enter the current password, new password, and new password again (for confirmation), and then click the
OK button.
Once the new password has been set, you must enter the new password to edit position data.
Fig. 5.4 System Password Window
49
5. Editing Position Data on CON Controllers and Older Models
Fig. 5.2 Setting of Application Window
5. Editing Position Data on CON Controllers and Older Models
In the position data edit window, you can create position data by “MDI (Mathematical Direct Input),” “Direct
Teaching,” “Jogging” or “Inching” operation.
Created/edited position data will become effective after it has been sent to the controller.
To send position data to the controller, click Position from the main menu and then select Send to Controller,
in the position data edit window.
or click
You can also check the teaching positions in two test operation modes: “Positioning” and “Program.”
“Modified” is shown if a
change has been made
to the loaded data.
* The input range is determined by soft limit + side and
soft limit – side of the parameter.
(Refer to 8, “Editing parameters.”)
The input range of each
item is shown.
Fig. 5.5 Position Data Edit Window (Detail Display in Online Mode): PCON, ACON, SCON, ERC2 and
ROBONET
(excluding the PCON-CA,
PCON-CB, ACON-CA, ACON-CB,
SCON-CA, SCON-CAL/CGAL and
SCON-CB)
(Versions older than V8.00.00.00)
50
Fig. 5.7 Jog Window (Online Display) : PCON-PL/PO, ACON-PL/PO, SCON-C, SCON-CA, SCON-CB,
PCON-CA, PCON-CB, ACON-CA, ACON-CB, DCON-CA,
DCON-CB or ERC3 in Pulse-train Mode
51
5. Editing Position Data on CON Controllers and Older Models
Fig. 5.6 Edit position data Window: PCON, ACON, SCON, ERC2, ERC3, ROBONET (Software Version
V8.00.00.00 or later),
PCON-CA, PCON-CB, ACON-CA, ACON-CB, DCON-CA, DCON-CB,
SCON-CA, SCON-CAL/CGAL, SCON-CB, MSCON, MCON
5. Editing Position Data on CON Controllers and Older Models
“Modified” is shown if a
change has been made
to the loaded data.
The input range of each
item is shown.
Fig. 5.8 Position Data Edit Window (Detail Display in Online Mode): RCP, RCS, E-Con, RCP2 and ERC
* While the position data edit window of a given axis is open in the online mode, the parameter edit window of
the same axis cannot be opened. (You can open the parameter edit window of any other axis.)
* When the MANU operation mode on the main window is monitor mode 1 or monitor mode 2, this online
mode cannot be executed.
Operations of writing into the controller, jog and home return cannot be performed.
The operating methods of buttons and input controls available in this window are explained below.
(1) Toolbar buttons
[1] [2] [3] [4]
[5] [6] [7]
[8] [9]
[10]
Fig. 5.9 Toolbar in Position Data Edit Window
[1] Save to file
Save data to a file.
[2] Send to controller
Send (write) data to the controller.
52
[3] Reload position data
Reload position data from the controller and then refresh the displayed data.
If the position data has been changed in the position data edit window (when “Modified” is shown in the
status bar), clicking this button will display the warning message shown in Fig. 5.10.
* Take note that if you select Yes in this window, data that have been edited but not yet been written to
the controller will be lost.
[4] Print
Output position data to the printer.
Print setting window is displayed. Set top, left and row margins
(mm) and printing orientation, and then print.
[5] Cut
Cut the range of data selected in the position data input area and
save it to the clipboard.
* You can select data in units of rows.
Fig. 5.11 Print Setting Window
[6] Copy
Copy to the clipboard the range of data selected in the position data input area.
* You can select data in units of rows.
[7] Paste
Paste the data that has been cut or copied from the position data input area, to the selected position.
[8] Switch display
Change the display mode of the position data input area from normal to detail (or vice versa).
(Fig. 5.24, Fig. 5.25) or (Fig. 5.27, Fig. 5.28)
[9] Show status monitor window
Display the status monitor window of the axis you are currently editing.
This window is the same as the one you can open by selecting Status from Monitor in the main menu
of the main window.
[10] Divide position data equally
Clicking this button will display the window shown in Fig. 5.12.
Set appropriate values in Start Position No. and End Position No., select an appropriate option
under Fraction processing, and then click OK. The distance between the specified two position data
will be divided equally. (This function is called “Equal division function”)
When the check box for “Also divide the velocity” is selected, the velocity between the two specified
position tables will also be divided equally. (The “Also divide the velocity” check box is available in Ver.
V6.00.04.00 or later.)
53
5. Editing Position Data on CON Controllers and Older Models
Fig. 5.10 Warning Message
5. Editing Position Data on CON Controllers and Older Models
* Clicking this button while multiple rows are selected in the position data input area will cause the software
to automatically populate the Start Position No. and End Position No. field.
Start Position No.: First position in the selected range
End Position No.: Last position in the selected range
Fig. 5.12 Divide Position Data at Equal Intervals Window
If data has been input between the specified two positions, the warning message in Fig. 5.13 will be displayed.
Fig. 5.13 Warning Message
The input fields of position data generated by the equal division function, other than Position and Comment, will
be populated by the corresponding values for the position specified in Start Position No. The Comment field will
be cleared.
* The equal division function can also be implemented from the pop-up menu (Fig. 5.14) displayed by
right-clicking the position data input area.
Fig. 5.14 Pop-up Menu
54
(2) Current position/alarm code
The current position of the axis you are editing (unit: mm) and the associated alarm code, if any, are shown.
Fig. 5.15 Current Position/Alarm Code
For emergency stop, “Emergency stop” is displayed on the current position and alarm code displaying part.
Fig. 5.16 Emergency Stop Indication
Fig. 5.17 Motor Voltage Low Indication
* When the motor voltage low is displayed, it means a state that the motor drive power is shut off.
(3) Jogging/Inching operation controls
Select Jog or Inc. (by adding a check mark to the corresponding checkbox) and use the Fw (+)  Bw (-)
buttons to move the axis.
Select the jogging speed from “1,” “10,” “30,” “50” and “100” [mm/sec] using the track bar.
In the inching mode, select the feed pitch from “0.03,” “0.10” and “0.50” [mm] using the applicable radio button.
A click will move the axis by the specified pitch, while holding down the mouse button will cause the axis to jog
at 1 mm/sec after 2 second. If the mouse button is held continuously, the jogging speed will increase from
“10” to “30” and to “100” [mm/sec] every second.
If home return has been completed, clicking Teach will load the current position to the point data input area.
* In the position data input area, the loaded data will be input to the row where the cursor is located. Check the
cursor position before clicking Teach.
Track bar
Checkbox
Radio buttons
Fig. 5.18 Jogging/Inching Operation Controls
55
5. Editing Position Data on CON Controllers and Older Models
When motor voltage lowers, “Motor volt. low” is displayed on the current position and alarm code displaying
part.
(4) Positioning (test operation mode)
You can move the axis to the position corresponding to the cursor row in the position data input area.
The moving speed is calculated by multiplying the speed set in the position data input area with the speed
factor. (The speed factor can also be set by the track bar.)
5. Editing Position Data on CON Controllers and Older Models
Speed factor
Track bar
Multiple axes
simultaneous start
Step, continue and stop
buttons from the left
Fig. 5.19 Positioning
(step) will move the axis by one position, while clicking
(continuous move) will cause the axis
Clicking
to move continuously by looping within the block of specified position data.
again while the axis is moving continuously will stop the axis when it reaches the next position.
Clicking
Clicking
will stop the axis (the axis will start decelerating the moment the button is clicked and continue to
decelerate until it finally stops.)
* What is a continuous move?
If a continuous move command is issued at position No. 2 when the position table is set as follows, the actuator
will operate continuously through a group of positions where data is available (= until the position immediately
before one where no data is registered (whose data fields are empty)), starting from the position at which the
command is issued. In this example, the actuator will operate from position No. 2  No. 3  No. 1  No. 2,
and so on.
Position
Velocity
Acceleration Deceleration
* If the data loaded from the controller has been changed, write the modified data again to the controller
beforehand.
* While this mode is active, data cannot be entered in the jogging/inching control groups or point data input
area.
● When PCON, ACON, DCON, SCON, MSCON, MCON, ERC2 and ERC3 are connected, the maximum
speed becomes the safety speed of 250 mm/sec or less if the MANU operation mode is set to the teach
mode 1 (safety speed effective).
56
Simultaneous Movement of Multiple Axes
(Note) MCON Controller is not applicable.
Multiple axes simultaneous start button
You can use this button to simultaneously move the selected axes, from among the multiple axes currently
connected by link cables.
Click the multiple axes simultaneous start button in the positioning setting area.
The “Start multiple axes simultaneously” window will open.
Axis number
Position
Checkbox
Step, continue and stop
buttons from the left
Fig. 5.21 Start Multiple Axes Simultaneously Window
57
5. Editing Position Data on CON Controllers and Older Models
Fig. 5.20 Multiple Axes Simultaneous Start Button
5. Editing Position Data on CON Controllers and Older Models
Checkbox:
The axes with a check mark in this box will move. The selectable checkboxes are
those of axes whose point edit window is currently open.
Axis:
Axis number.
Position:
Set a position number in one field. This position determines the movement range
for each specified axis based on a routine similar to continuous movement, and the
axis will move over the determined range. All selected axes will move to this
position. (If no position data is set, the axes will not move.)
Location:
The current position of each axis is shown.
Step movement button:
Clicking this button will move the axes to the next position and complete the
movement.
Continuous move button: Move the axes continuously. If this button is clicked during continuous movement,
the axes will stop moving after they have reached the current positions.
Stop button:
Clicking this button will cancel the current movement and stop the axes on the spot.
* Step movement and continuous movement are activated at a speed set with the position data of each axis.
Example of use) When the “Start multiple axes simultaneously” window is set as shown in Fig. 5.21 and
position data for each axis is set as follows
Axis number
Position
Clicking
(continuous movement) will move the actuators as follows.
Axis number 0 Axis number 1 Axis number 2 Axis number 3
After all specified axes have
completed their movement, they will
move to the next positions.
Does not move.
Does not move.
Does not move.
Does not move.
 The actuator corresponding to axis number 2 does not move, because its checkbox is not selected.
 The actuators do not move if position data is not set for the corresponding axes.
58
(5) Program
Position number input area
Start button
Fig. 5.22 Program Mode
Clicking Start will start the specified movement, and the button text will change to Stop. The button text will
change back to Start when the movement ends or the button is clicked again. The sequence set in the program
mode will not be saved to the controller or a file. (for the versions before V9.00.00.00)
For Version V9.00.00.00 and later, the files can be stored.
The stop time of “T1” to “T5” can be set if clicking on “Stop Time Setting”.
(V8.03.00.00 or later)
Fig. 5.23 Stop Time Setting
If a repeat of “R” is set and “Number of Program Execution” is 0, it continuously moves until it stops.
If the number is indicated, the move is executed up to the indicated number. The remaining times is displayed
in Remaining. “Number of Program Execution” would not be set if a repeat of “R” is not set. (V8.03.00.00 or
later)
59
5. Editing Position Data on CON Controllers and Older Models
Just like positioning, this is also a test operation mode. In the program mode, however, you can set a desired
sequence of movement.
In the position number input area, enter position numbers (0 to maximum numbers of positions), or if repeated
execution is required, input “R” (a symbol specifying a repeat of the preceding numbers) at the end, and then
click Start.
The stop time of “T1” to “T5” is able to be input between position number from the Version V8.03.00.00 and
later.
Up to 16 steps can be specified, including “R.”
If a blank field exists, all subsequent steps are considered invalid. The simple program stops. All steps after “R”
are also considered invalid.
(6) Servo, Home and Alarm buttons
5. Editing Position Data on CON Controllers and Older Models
Fig. 5.24 Servo, Home and Alarm Buttons
[1] Servo button
This button lets you turn on/off the servo.
When the servo is on, a blue lamp illuminates on the button.
After home return, you can turn off the servo, move the actuator manually and then click Teach to
capture a desired position.
Note: Closing the software when the servo is off will keep the servo in the off state, thus disabling the PIO
operation.
To reset the servo, restart the software with the controller connected, or reconnect the controller
power.
[2] Home button
This button lets you perform home return.
Once home return is complete, a green lamp will illuminate on the button.
[3] Alarm button
This button lets you reset an alarm.
Note that an alarm can be reset only when the servo is off and the cause of the alarm has been
removed.
While an alarm is present, a red lamp remains lit on the button.
60
(7) Position data input area: PCON, PCON-CA, PCON-CB, ACON, ACON-CA, ACON-CB, DCON-CA,
DCON-CB, SCON-C, SCON-CA, SCON-CAL/CGAL, SCON-CB, ERC2, ERC3, ROBONET, MSCON
and MCON
As shown in the table, the zone+, zone-, acceleration and deceleration mode, stop mode are enabled or
disabled depending on the type of controller.
List of ON/OFF of Position Table According to Model
AccDcl Mode
Stop Mode
Position Table
Zone +/-
Trapezoid
S-shape
First-order
Delay
Gain Set
Full Servo
Auto
Servo
OFF
Vib. Sup.
No.
ERC2

PIO pattern: 3

×
×


×
×
ERC2-SE

-

×
×

×
×
×
ERC3

PIO pattern: 3





×
×
PIO pattern: 0, 1, 2, 4, 5





×
×
ERC3 PIO Converter 
PCON-C/CG/CF

PIO pattern: 0, 1, 2, 4, 5

×
×


×
×
PCON-CA

PIO pattern: 0, 1, 2, 4, 5





×
×
-CY

PIO pattern: 1

×
×


×
×
-SE

-

×
×

×
×
×
PCON-CB

PIO pattern: 0, 1, 2, 4, 5,
6, 7





×
×
PCON-CYB

PIO pattern: 0, 2, 3, 4, 5





×
×
RPCON

PIO pattern: 0, 1, 2, 4, 5

×
×

×
×
×
ACON-C/CG

PIO pattern: 0, 1, 2, 4, 5




×
×
-CY

PIO pattern: 1




×
×
-SE

-



×
×
×
RACON

PIO pattern: 0, 1, 2, 4, 5



×
×
×
ACON-CA

PIO pattern: 0, 1, 2, 4, 5






ACON-CB

PIO pattern: 0, 1, 2, 4, 5






ACON-CYB

PIO pattern: 0, 2, 3, 4, 5






61
5. Editing Position Data on CON Controllers and Older Models
Input the position data.
It is normally possible to input five items of Position, Speed, Acceleration (ACC), Deceleration (DCL) and
Comment, however, it becomes further possible to input items of Push, Threshold (LoTh), Positioning Band,
Zone+, Zone-, Acceleration and deceleration (Acc/Dcl) mode, Incremental (ABS/INC), Command (Cmnd)
.
mode and Stop mode by switching to detailed indication with the Indication switching button
In Version V8.03.00.00, “Command Mode” changes to “Gain Set” and “Vib. Sup. No.” is also added. (Refer to
(8), “Position data input area: SCON-CA, SCON-CB, SCON-CAL/CGAL, PCON-CA, ACON-CA, ACON-CB,
DCON-CA, DCON-CB, ERC3, MSCON and MCON.”)
AccDcl Mode
5. Editing Position Data on CON Controllers and Older Models
Position Table
Zone +/-
Stop Mode
Trapezoid
S-shape
First-order
Delay
Full Servo
Auto
Servo
OFF
Gain Set
Vib. Sup.
No.
DCON-CA

PIO pattern: 0, 1, 2, 4, 5




×
×
DCON-CB

PIO pattern: 0, 1, 2, 4, 5




×
×
DCON-CYB

PIO pattern: 0, 2, 3, 4, 5




×
×
SCON-C positioner

PIO pattern: 0, 1, 2, 4, 5




×
×
SCON-CA positioner 
PIO pattern: 0, 1, 2, 4, 5,
6, 7




PIO pattern: 0, 1, 2, 4, 5,
6, 7



SCON-CB positioner 
PIO pattern: 0, 1, 2, 4, 5,
6, 7



SCON-CAL/CGAL
MSCON

-



MSCON
(Pulse motor type)

-



Tra

nsport
ed load
MSCON
(Servo motor type)

-



MSCON
(Brushless DC
motor)

-



62
Fig. 5.25 Position Data Input Area (Normal Mode)
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11] [12] [13]
Fig. 5.26 Position Data Input Area (Detail Mode)
[1] No.:
Indicates the position data number.
Warning: In the case of a PCON-C/CG/CF, PCON-CA, PCON-CB, ACON-C/CG, ACON-CA,
ACON-CB, DCON-CA, DCON-CB, SCON-C, SCON-CA, SCON-CAL/CGAL, SCON-CB,
ROBONET, ERC3 PIO Converter, MSCON (remote I/O mode) or MCON (remote I/O mode)
controller operating in solenoid mode 2 or PCON-CY or ACON-CY controller operating in
solenoid mode 0, be sure to use absolute coordinates. If relative coordinates are used,
position data errors will occur.
Also note that if relative coordinates are used on any of these controllers operating the
specified push mode, completion of push operation cannot be determined.
[2] Position: Input the target position to move the actuator to, in [mm].
 Absolute Coordinates (Incremental:0) : Input the target location by determining the
distance between the original point and target
position. No negative value can be input.
 Relative Coordinates (Incremental:1) : Input the target location by determining the
distance between the current position and target
position. Any negative value can be input (if
coordinates are in the negative direction).
[3] Vel:
 Input the speed at which the actuator will be moved, in [mm/sec].
The initial value will depend on the actuator type.
(Note) For SCON-CA, SCON-CAL/CGAL, SCON-CB, PCON-CA, PCON-CB, ACON-CA,
ACON-CB, DCON-CA, DCON-CB, ERC3, MSCON and MCON, an alarm will be
displayed if the set value is lower than the minimum velocity.
63
5. Editing Position Data on CON Controllers and Older Models
[1]
[4] Acc/Dcl:
Input the acceleration/deceleration at which the actuator will be moved, in [G].
Basically, use acceleration/deceleration within the catalog rated value range.
The input range allows larger value input than the catalog rated values, on the assumption
that the cycle time will be reduced if the transfer mass is significantly smaller than the rated
value.
Make the numeric value smaller if transferred work part vibrates and causes trouble during
acceleration/deceleration.
5. Editing Position Data on CON Controllers and Older Models
Speed
Acceleration
Deceleration
Time
Target
position
Target
position
The acceleration will become sudden if the numeric value is made larger, and it will become
gradual if the numeric value is made smaller.
(Note) For SCON-CA, SCON-CAL/CGAL, SCON-CB, PCON-CA, PCON-CB, ACON-CA,
ACON-CB, DCON-CA, DCON-CB, ERC3, MSCON and MCON an alarm will be
displayed if the set value exceeds the rated acceleration/deceleration.
Caution:
(1)
(2)
(3)
[5] Push:
Enter appropriate values for Vel and Acc/Dcl in such a way as to prevent excessive
impact or vibration from being applied to the actuator in consideration of the installation
conditions and the shape of transferred work part by referring to the “List of Actuator
Specifications” in the Appendix of the operation manual for each controller.
Increasing such values largely relates to the transfer mass and the actuator
characteristics vary depending on the model, consult IAI regarding the input-limiting
values.
Establish the setting as the datum on one finger for Gripper Type. Therefore, the relative
speed and relative acceleration/deceleration between two fingers should be counted
double.
For rotary actuators and lever type grippers, the values are to be treated as an angle.
[mm] becomes [deg].
S2
For acceleration/deceleration, the values are defined 1G = 9800deg/ as the standard.
S2
e.g. 0.3G should be taken as 2940deg/ .
 Select the positioning operation or push operation.
The default value is “0.”
0
: Normal positioning operation
Other than 0: Indicates the current-limiting value and indicates the push operation.
64
[6] LoTh
:  In the case of a SCON-CA, SCON-CAL/CGAL, SCON-CB, PCON-CF, PCON-CFA, and
PCON-CFB controller, the load output signal (PI0) will be output when the command
torque exceeds the value set in the “LoTh” field (%) within the certification range.
The certification range is set by “Zone+/-.”
Use this signal to determine if a press-fit operation has been successful.
* For details, refer to the operation manual for your applicable controller.
[7] Positioning band :  The “positioning operation” and “push operation” have different meanings.
Positioning operation:
It defines the distance to the target position from a position at which the position
complete signal turns ON. The default value is 0.1 mm.
Standard type
Since increasing the positioning band value
hastens the next sequence operation, it
becomes a factor for cycle time reduction. Set
the optimum value by considering the balance
of the entire equipment.
Positioning band
Target
position
Note that with a PCON-C/CG/CF, PCON-CA, PCON-CB, ACON-C/CG, ACON-CA, ACON-CB, DCON-CA,
DCON-CB, SCON-C, SCON-CA, SCON-CAL/CGAL, SCON-CB, ERC3 PIO Converter, MSCON (remote I/O
mode) or MCON (remote I/O mode)controller operating in solenoid mode 2 or PCON-CY or ACON-CY
operating in solenoid mode 1, you should define the band within which the complete signal will turn ON.
PCON-C/CG/CF, PCON-CA, PCON-CB,
ACON-C/CG, ACON-CA, ACON-CB, DCON-CA,
DCON-CB, SCON-C, SCON-CA,
SCON-CAL/CGAL, SCON-CB, ERC3 PIO
Converter, MSCON (remote I/O mode) or MCON
(remote I/O mode)controller operating in solenoid
mode 2 or PCON-CY or ACON-CY operating in
ON
OFF
Position complete signal
Positioning band
Target
position
Push operation:
It defines the maximum push amount from the target position in the push operation.
Set the positioning band in such a way as to prevent positioning completion before the
actuator contacts work part by considering mechanical variations of work part.
Position at which the position complete
signal turns ON when the actuator contacts
work part and push completion is judged
Work
part
Target
position
Positioning band
(maximum push amount)
(Note) For PCON-CA, PCON-CB, ACON-CA, ACON-CB, DCON-CA, DCON-CB and
ERC3, a smaller value than the minimum positioning band width cannot be set.
65
5. Editing Position Data on CON Controllers and Older Models
Timing of position
complete signal turning ON
[8] Zone +:
[9] Zone -:
 It defines the zone where the zone output signal of the standard type turns ON.
 Individual setting is available for each target position to give flexibility.
[Setting example]
No.
0
1
2
Position [mm]
5.00
380.00
200.00
Zone+ [mm]
100.00
400.00
250.00
Zone- [mm]
0.00
300.00
150.00
5. Editing Position Data on CON Controllers and Older Models
Movement command to Position No. 0 (backward end)
Zone output signal
Home
Backward
end
Movement command to Position No. 1 (forward end)
Forward
+ side limit
end
Zone output signal
Movement command to Position No. 2 (midpoint)
Midpoint
Zone output signal
66
Note
Backward end
Forward end
Midpoint
[10] Acc/Dcl Mode:
 It defines the acceleration/deceleration characteristics.
The default value is 0.
0: Trapezoid pattern
1: S-shaped motion
2: First-order delay filter
Trapezoid pattern
Speed
Deceleration
Acceleration
* Set the acceleration and deceleration in the “Acc” and “Dcl” fields of the position table.
S-shaped motion
A curve, which is gradual at the beginning of acceleration but rises sharply halfway, is
drawn.
Use it in the applications for which you want to set the acceleration/deceleration high due to
cycle time requirement but desire a gradual curve at the beginning of movement or
immediately before stop.
Speed
Time
(Note)
* Set the degree of the S-shaped motion with the parameter No. 56 [S-shaped motion ratio
setting]. The setting unit is % and the setting range is between 0 and 100.
(The above is the image graph when 100% setting is made.)
If “0” is set, the S-shaped motion becomes invalid.
However, it will not be reflected in jogging/increment movement by PC or Teaching
Pendant operation.
It cannot be set for the ERC2, PCON-C or RPCON controller. The parameter No. 56 is reserved.
67
5. Editing Position Data on CON Controllers and Older Models
Time
First-order delay filter
More gradual acceleration/deceleration curves are drawn than the linear
acceleration/deceleration (trapezoid pattern).
Use this in the applications by giving micro vibrations to work part during
acceleration/deceleration not desired.
Speed
5. Editing Position Data on CON Controllers and Older Models
Time
* Set the degree of the first-order lag with the parameter No. 55 (constant for the position
command first-order filtering). The setting unit is 0.1 msec and the setting range is
between 0.0 and 100.0.
If “0” is set, the first-lag filter will become invalid.
However, it will not be reflected in jogging/increment movement by PC or Teaching
Pendant operation.
(Note) It cannot be set for the ERC2, PCON or RPCON controller. The parameter No. 55
is reserved.
[11] ABS/INC:
 Select either the absolute or incremental positioning.
The factory setting is 0.
0: Absolute positioning
1: Incremental positioning
Warning: In the case of a PCON-C/CG, PCON-CA, PCON-CB, ACON-C/CG,
ACON-CA, ACON-CB, DCON-CA, DCON-CB, SCON-C, SCON-CA,
SCON-CAL/CGAL, SCON-CB, ERC3 PIO Converter, MSCON (remote I/O
mode) or MCON (remote I/O mode) controller operating in solenoid mode 2 or
PCON-CY or ACON-CY controller operating in solenoid mode 0, be sure to
use absolute coordinates. If relative coordinates are used, position data errors
will occur.
[12] Cmnd Mode:  This field is invalid.
The factory setting is 0.
68
[13] Stop Mode:  It defines the power saving method on standby after completion of positioning to the target
position set in the “Position” field of the position number.
0: No power saving method * The default setting is 0 (none).
1: Auto servo OFF method. Delay time defined with the parameter No. 36
2: Auto servo OFF method. Delay time defined with the parameter No. 37
3: Auto servo OFF method. Delay time defined with the parameter No. 38
4: Full servo control method
Auto servo OFF method
When a given length of time has elapsed after completion of positioning, the servo OFF status is
automatically entered.
(Since the holding current does not flow, the power consumption can be saved by the same
amount.)
When a movement command is subsequently given from PLC, the status returns to the servo ON
and the actuator starts to move.
Movement
command
Auto servo OFF
(Green LED flashing)
Servo status
Servo ON status
Actuator movement
Target position
T: Delay time (sec) until the servo OFF
status is entered after completion of
positioning
It is set with the parameter.
69
5. Editing Position Data on CON Controllers and Older Models
Full servo control method
The holding current can be reduced by servo-controlling the pulse motor.
The degree of reduction varies depending on the actuator model, load condition, etc., but the
holding current decreases approximately by a factor of 1/2 to 1/4.
No displacement occurs since this method maintains the servo ON status.
The actual holding current can be checked on the monitoring window of PC software.
(8) Position data input area
5. Editing Position Data on CON Controllers and Older Models
On the SCON-CA (Software Version V8.00.00.00 or later), SCON-CB, ACON-CA, ACON-CB, MSCON,
SCON-CAL/CGAL and MCON the following input items have been changed or added.
These items are effective only on SCON-CA, SCON-CAL/CGAL, SCON-CB, ACON-CA, ACON-CB, MSCON
and MCON (Servo motor type) controllers:
[1] Gain Set
“Cmnd Mode” has been changed to “Gain Set.”
[2] Vib. Sup. No. “Vib. Sup. No.” has been added.
(Note) For PCON, ACON, SCON-C, DCON-CA, DCON-CB, ERC2 and ROBONET as well as SCON-CA,
SCON-CB, SCON-CAL/CGAL, ACON-CA, ACON-CB, MSCON and MCON, Version V8.00.00.00 and
later show the following screen display.
[1]
[2]
Fig. 5.27
The changed/added items are explained below.
[1] Gain Set ·········Six parameters needed to adjust the servo gain are put together as one set. Four different
sets can be registered, so you can switch the servo gain for each positioning operation.
[Parameters constituting one set]
• Servo gain number (position gain)
• Position feed-forward gain
• Speed loop proportional gain
• Speed loop integral gain
• Torque filter time constant
• Current control band number
Setting
0
1
2
3
Operation after completion of position
Gain set 0
Gain set 1
Gain set 2
Gain set 3
70
Parameter number
7, 71, 31 to 33, 54
120 to125
126 to131
132 to137
[2] Vib. Sup. No. ····You can suppress the vibration (resonance) of the load installed on the actuator.
Three levels of vibration can be suppressed.
Four parameters are provided for each vibration level, where all four parameters constitute
one set.
Set the position number requiring vibration suppression, and applicable parameter set, in
the position table.
Setting
0
2
3
Parameter number
–
97 to 100
101 to 104
105 to 108
Warning: (1) Vibration frequencies that can be controlled (target characteristic vibration frequencies)
are from 0.5 Hz to 30 Hz.
(2) Only the vibration of the load induced by the actuator connected to this controller is
suppressed. No other vibration can be controlled.
(3) Vibration can be suppressed only in the same direction as the moving direction of the
actuator. Vibration in no other direction can be controlled.
(4) Vibration cannot be suppressed during home return or push-motion operation.
(5) This function is not available in the pulse-train input mode.
(6) When the set characteristic vibration frequency is low, the cycle time may become
longer. As a guide, the positioning settling time becomes 150 ms or longer when the
characteristic vibration frequency is approx. 6 Hz or below.
71
5. Editing Position Data on CON Controllers and Older Models
1
Suppressing vibration frequency
(characteristic vibration frequency)
Normal position control (No control)
Parameter set for vibration suppression
control 1
Parameter set for vibration suppression
control 2
Parameter set for vibration suppression
control 3
(9) Position data input area: RCP, RCS, E-Con, RCP2 and ERC
5. Editing Position Data on CON Controllers and Older Models
Enter position data in this area.
It is normally possible to input four items of “Position,” “Speed,” “ACC” and “Comment,” however, it becomes
further possible to input items of “Push,” “Pos. band,” “MAX ACC,” “ABS INC” by switching to detailed
.
indication with the “Indication switching” button
Fig. 5.28 Position Data Input Area (Normal Mode)
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
Fig. 5.29 Position Data Input Area (Detail Mode)
[1] No.:
Shows position data No.
[2] Position:
The desired move location from home in millimeters.
 Absolute Positioning: (Incremental:0) Moves the actuator to the desired location in
reference to the home location. Inputting negative
values is not possible.
 Relative Positioning: (Incremental:1) Moves the actuator to the desired position in
reference to the current position. Inputting negatives
values is possible. (during negative direction of the
display coordinate)
Caution: There are cases when the input value may be rounded off to the least common denominator
multiple of the controller. (when data is acquired from the controller).
72
 The speed when moving the actuator (mm/sec).
The default value will depend on the actuator type.
[4] Acc/Dcl:
 The acceleration/deceleration setting for the move to the corresponding position (in G’s).
The default value will depend on the actuator type.
[5] Push:
 Selects the positioning mode or push mode.
The default value is set as 0.
0:
Positioning Mode (normal movement)
Besides 0: Push Mode (%)
 In the case of push mode, data number is the motor current limiting value during push.
Uses a value that matches the actuator type with a maximum value of 70%.
[6] Positioning band :
 In positioning mode, the position complete detection band (distance to the target position).
 The distance to the target position refers to the distance before the value entered here
reaches the target position and the position complete signal is output once the actuator
enters that range.
The default value will depend on the actuator type. (see diagram A)
 The push mode uses the maximum push amount (distance from the target position). [mm]
(see diagram B)
 When the push direction is negative direction of display coordinates, a “minus” sign should
be placed in the input value.
Transfer distance
Diagram A
Speed
Speed
[5] When push = 0
[1] Distance up to the position
[6] Positioning band
73
[5] When push  0
[1] Distance up to the position
Transfer distance
Diagram B
[6] Positioning band
5. Editing Position Data on CON Controllers and Older Models
[3] Vel:
[7] When acceleration only MAX = 0
[7] When acceleration only MAX = 1
[4] The value set in
acceleration/deceleration
Speed
Speed
5. Editing Position Data on CON Controllers and Older Models
[7] MAX Acceleration:
 Selects either the assigned acceleration or the maximum acceleration. Inputs are either 1
or 0. The default value is set as 0.
0: Assigned acceleration
The value placed in [4] will be used as the actual acceleration value and
deceleration value.
1: Maximum acceleration
This will automatically utilize the maximum acceleration matched to the load.
Deceleration remains as the assigned value in [4].
The maximum acceleration
matches the load
Transfer
distance
Transfer
distance
[8] ABS/INC
[4] The value set in
acceleration/deceleration
Select either the absolute or incremental positioning.
0: Absolute positioning
1: Incremental positioning
74
5.2 Offline Mode
When editing data after creating new data or loading data from a file, you are editing the data in the offline
mode.
In this mode, the window controls relating to axis operation are grayed out, and only the toolbar buttons and
position data input area become active. Items that cannot be operated offline are grayed out.
5.2.1 Creating New Position Data
To create new position data, click File from the main menu, and then select New.
[1] When the position data format selection window appears, select the controller whose position data you
want to create, and then click OK.
[2] The position data input window appears.
Enter position data in the position data input area.
Tool buttons
Position data input area
Fig. 5.31 Position Data Edit Window (Offline Mode – New)
75
5. Editing Position Data on CON Controllers and Older Models
Fig. 5.30 Position Data Format Selection Window
5. Editing Position Data on CON Controllers and Older Models
[3] The created position data can be saved to a file or sent to the connected controller.
(Saving the position data to a file)
To save the position data to a file, click the tool button
.
The save as window appears.
Enter a desired file name and click the Save button, and the position data will be saved to a file under the
specified name.
Fig. 5.32 Save As Window
(Sending the position data to the connected controller)
Connect the controller and PC.
Click Position and select Send to Controller, or click the tool button
.
When the axis selection window appears, select the axis number of the controller to send the position data to.
(Refer to 4, “Selecting an Axis.”)
* “Comments” can be saved only to files. They cannot be saved to controllers.
76
5.2.2 Reading a File
To read position data from a file, click File and then select Open to open the “Open” window. Alternatively, you
can click File, point to Send to Controller and then select Position to open the “Open” window.
Select folder in which
position data is saved.
Saved file name
Fig. 5.33 “Open” Window
Select (click) “File name” you want to open, and click Open on the “Open” window, then the position data edit
window is displayed.
Position data can be edited offline.
Tool buttons
Position data input area
Fig. 5.34 Position Data Edit Window (Offline Mode)
77
5. Editing Position Data on CON Controllers and Older Models
Select controller.
5. Editing Position Data on CON Controllers and Older Models
The edited position data can be saved to a file or sent to the connected controller.
(Saving the position data to a file)
To save the position data to a file, click the tool button
.
The save as window appears.
Enter a desired file name and click the Save button, and the position data will be saved to a file under the
specified name.
Fig. 5.35 Save As Window
(Sending the position data to the connected controller)
Connect the controller and PC.
Click Position and select Send to Controller, or click the tool button
.
When the axis selection window appears, select the axis number of the controller to send the position data to.
(Refer to 4, “Selecting an Axis.”)
* “Comments” can be saved only to files. They cannot be saved to controllers.
78
6.
Initial Setting and Position Data Editing for SEP
Controllers
SEP controllers: ASEP, PSEP, DSEP and MSEP
6.1 Initial Setting
Select a desired operation pattern (PIO pattern) (from 0 to 5) and set the necessary operation parameters
(such as selecting the single-solenoid or double-solenoid mode).
(Note) For Fieldbus Type MSEP Controllers, Positioner Mode of Operation Pattern (PIO Pattern) 6 can be
selected. The initial setting is not necessary if Positioner Mode is selected.
Fig. 6.1 Input Password Window
To change the password, perform the operations explained below.
79
6. Initial Setting and Position Data Editing for SEP Controllers
Click Setup from the main menu, point to Controller Setup, and then select Initial Setting for SEP
Controller.
If the input password window appears, enter the password.
* On the versions V7.00.03.00 or later, the default password is “0000”, so the input password window will not
appear.
* On the versions V7.00.01.00/V7.00.02.00, the default password is “5119.” Enter “5119” and click the OK
button.
[How to Set Initial Password]
* The password should be the same as the one used for editing parameters.
When the password set here is changed, the parameter edit password will also change to the new password.
6. Initial Setting and Position Data Editing for SEP Controllers
[1] From the main menu, click Setting and then select Application.
Click the Change Password button.
Fig. 6.2 Setting of Application Window
[2] Enter the current password, (the default password is “0000” for Version V7.00.03.00 or later, or "5119" for
Version V7.00.01.00/V7.00.02.00), new password, and new password again (for confirmation), and then
click the OK button.
Fig. 6.3 System Password Window
Select a desired operation pattern in the IO pattern select window, and then click OK.
(Note) When connected to MSEP Controllers, 6: Positioner Mode is displayed. If 6: Positioner Mode is
selected, it is not necessary to have the initial setting process. The initial setting window would not
appear.
Fig. 6.4 IO Pattern Select Window
80
In the initial setting for SEP controller window, set the necessary operation parameters (such as selecting the
single-solenoid or double-solenoid mode), and then click OK.
The operation parameters to be set vary depending on the operation pattern (PIO pattern). Those parameters
that need not be set are grayed out.
In the confirmation window for restarting the controller (resetting the software), click Yes.
Fig. 6.6 Confirmation Window for Restarting Controller
If the actuator servo is currently ON, a warning window appears with the message saying that you must turn
OFF the servo. Click Yes.
Fig. 6.7 Warning Window
The controller will be restarted and the operation parameters you have set will be applied to the controller.
81
6. Initial Setting and Position Data Editing for SEP Controllers
Fig. 6.5 Initial Setting for SEP Controller Window
Six types of operation patterns (PIO patterns) are available on ASEP, PSEP, DSEP and MSEP controllers.
Set each item according to the selected operation pattern (PIO pattern).
(Note) For MSEP Controllers, Positioner Mode of Operation Pattern (PIO Pattern) 6 can be selected in addition
to the 6 types. The initial setting is not necessary if Positioner Mode is selected.
Operation pattern
Equivalent air cylinder circuits are shown for your reference.
Operation pattern
6. Initial Setting and Position Data Editing for SEP Controllers
PIO pattern 0
Single solenoid type
(Standard movement
between 2 points)
Description
The actuator can be moved
between two points using the
same control you normally use
with an air cylinder.
The target position (forward end,
backward end) can be set.
The travel speed and
acceleration/deceleration can be
specified.
Push-motion operation can also be
performed.
Motorized cylinder connection
method
Motorized cylinder
Air cylinder
Backward end
position detection
signal (LS0)
Forward end position
detection signal (LS1)
ASEP,
PSEP,
DSEP,
MSEP
Dedicated
cable
Movement signal
(STO)
Backward end
position detection
signal (LS0)
Forward end position
detection signal (LS1)
Movement signal
(STO)
Solenoid
Spring
Solenoid
P (Air)
PIO pattern 0
Double solenoid type
(Standard movement
between 2 points)
Motorized cylinder
Air cylinder
Backward end
position detection
signal (LS0)
Forward end position
detection signal (LS1)
ASEP,
PSEP,
DSEP,
MSEP
Dedicated
cable
The actuator can be moved
between two points using the
same control you normally use
with an air cylinder.
The speed can be changed during
movement.
The target position (forward end,
backward end) can be set.
The travel speed and
acceleration/deceleration can be
specified.
Push-motion operation can also be
performed.
Backward end
position detection
signal (LS0)
Forward end position
detection signal (LS1)
Solenoid
Forward end
movement signal (ST1)
Backward end
movement signal (ST0)
Forward end
movement signal (ST1)
Backward end
movement signal (ST0)
PIO pattern 1
Single solenoid type
(Movement between
two points)
(Change travel speed)
Air cylinder circuit (reference)
Solenoid
(Air)
Motorized cylinder
Air cylinder
Backward end
position detection
signal (LS0)
Forward end position
detection signal (LS1)
Movement signal
ASEP,
PSEP,
DSEP,
MSEP
Dedicated
cable
Travel speed switching
signal (SPDC)
PIO pattern 1
Double solenoid type
(Movement between
two points)
(Change travel speed)
Backward end
position detection
signal (LS0)
Forward end position
detection signal (LS1)
Movement signal
Solenoid
Travel speed switching
signal (SPDC)
(Air)
Motorized cylinder
Air cylinder
Backward end
position detection
signal (LS0)
Forward end position
detection signal (LS1)
ASEP,
PSEP,
DSEP,
MSEP
Dedicated
cable
Backward end
position detection
signal (LS0)
Forward end position
detection signal (LS1)
Forward end
movement signal (ST1)
Backward end
movement signal (ST0)
Forward end
movement signal (ST1)
Backward end
movement signal (ST0)
Travel speed switching
signal (SPDC)
Travel speed switching
signal (SPDC)
Solenoid
Solenoid
(Air)
(Note) The air cylinder circuits are drawn with signal symbols corresponding to those used by ASEP,
PSEP, DSEP and MSEP controllers.
For details on signal symbols, refer to “ASEP/PSEP/DSEP Operation Manual” and “MSEP
Operation Manual”.
82
Operation pattern
Equivalent air cylinder circuits are shown for your reference.
Operation pattern
Description
Motorized cylinder
Air cylinder
Backward end
position detection
signal (LS0)
Forward end position
detection signal (LS1)
ASEP,
PSEP,
DSEP,
MSEP
Dedicated
cable
Movement signal
PIO pattern 4
Double solenoid type
(Movement by 3 inputs
among 3 points)
PIO pattern 5
(Continuous
back-and-forth
operation)
The actuator can be moved
among three points using the
same control you normally use
with an air cylinder.
The target position (forward end,
backward end) can be set.
The travel speed and
acceleration/deceleration can be
specified.
Push-motion operation can also
be performed.
P (Air)
Target position
switching signal (CN1)
P (Air)
Motorized cylinder
Air cylinder
Backward end
position detection
signal (LS0)
Forward end position
detection signal (LS1)
ASEP,
PSEP,
DSEP,
MSEP
Dedicated
cable
Target position
switching signal (CN1)
The actuator can be moved
among three points using the
same control you normally use
with an air cylinder.
The target position (forward end,
backward end) can be set.
The travel speed and
acceleration/deceleration can be
specified.
Push-motion operation can also
be performed.
Backward end
position detection
signal (LS0)
Forward end position
detection signal (LS1)
Movement signal
Target position
switching signal (CN1)
Forward end
movement signal (ST1)
Backward end
movement signal (ST0)
PIO pattern 3
Single solenoid type
(Movement by 2 inputs
among 3 points)
Air cylinder circuit (reference)
Backward end
position detection
signal (LS0)
Forward end position
detection signal (LS1)
Forward end
movement signal (ST1)
Backward end
movement signal (ST0)
P (Air)
P (Air)
Target position
switching signal (CN1)
Motorized cylinder
Air cylinder
Backward end position
detection signal (LS0)
Forward end position
detection signal (LS1)
Midway position
detection signal (LS2)
ASEP,
PSEP,
DSEP,
MSEP
Dedicated
cable
Backward end position
detection signal (LS0)
Forward end position
detection signal (LS1)
Midway position
detection signal (LS2)
Movement signal 1
Movement signal 1
Movement signal 2
Movement signal 2
P (Air)
P (Air)
P (Air)
Motorized cylinder
Air cylinder
Backward end position
detection signal (LS0)
Forward end position
detection signal (LS1)
Midway position
detection signal (LS2)
Midway point
movement signal (ST2)
Forward end
movement signal (ST1)
Backward end
movement signal (ST0)
The actuator moves back and forth
between the two points of forward
end and backward end.
The target position (forward end,
backward end) can be set.
The travel speed and
acceleration/deceleration can be
specified.
Push-motion operation can also
be performed.
Backward end position
detection signal (LS0)
ASEP,
PSEP,
DSEP,
MSEP
Dedicated
cable
Forward end position
detection signal (LS1)
Midway position
detection signal (LS2)
Midway point movement
signal (ST2)
Forward end movement
signal (ST1)
Backward end
movement signal (ST0)
P (Air)
P (Air)
P (Air)
(Note) The air cylinder circuits are drawn with signal symbols corresponding to those used by ASEP,
PSEP, DSEP and MSEP controllers.
For details on signal symbols, refer to “ASEP/PSEP/DSEP Operation Manual” and “MSEP
Operation Manual”.
83
6. Initial Setting and Position Data Editing for SEP Controllers
The actuator can be moved
between two points using the
same control you normally use
with an air cylinder.
You can switch between
positioning operation and
push-motion operation during
operation.
The target position (forward end,
backward end) can be set.
The travel speed and
acceleration/deceleration can be
PIO pattern 2
specified.
Double solenoid type
Push-motion operation can also
(Movement between two
be performed.
points)
(Position data change)
PIO pattern 2
Single solenoid type
(Movement between two
points)
(Position data change)
Motorized cylinder connection
method
[Types of Operation Parameters]
 Solenoid
Select either the single-solenoid operation mode or double-solenoid operation mode.
 Servo control
Select whether or not to use servo control (IN3 input signal SON (servo ON/OFF control)).
6. Initial Setting and Position Data Editing for SEP Controllers
 Stop signal
Select whether or not to use the pause signal *STP (input to IN2) when the single-solenoid type and
operation pattern 5 are selected.
 Input signal mode
Select continuous current flow (level) or instantaneous current flow (edge) as the double-solenoid ON
condition when the double-solenoid type and operation pattern 4 are selected.
 Home operation
Select a desired home return method.
 AUTO: Home return commences when the power is input.
 MANU: Home return commences when the ST0 signal is input for the first time after the power has been
input.
 Output signal type
Select the signal to be output after the actuator has moved and positioning is completed.
Select either the limit switch (LS) or positioning (PE) signal.
 Output signal
 When operation pattern 0, 1, 2 or 5 is selected:
 Select one of the following options.
Selection 1
OUT2
OUT3
HEND
(home return complete signal)
*ALM
(alarm output signal)
Selection 2
SV
(servo ON output signal)
*ALM
(alarm output signal)
Selection 3
HEND
(home return complete signal)
SV
(servo ON output signal)
 When operation pattern 3 or 4 is selected:
Select either *ALM (alarm) or SV (servo ON output signal) for the OUT3 output signal.
 Intermediate position move mode
Select whether the ST0 and ST1 signals must be both ON or both OFF for the actuator to move to the
intermediate position when operation pattern 3 is set.
84
The operation parameters to be set vary depending on the operation pattern (PIO pattern).
Setting item
Operation pattern
Operation
mode
Midway
position
Movement
method
Double
solenoid
type
Pause
Signal *STP
Control
Servo
SON
Single
solenoid/
double
solenoid
Both OFF/
Both ON
Level
Edge
Not used
Use
Non-use
Control
OUT2,
OUT3
OUT3
Home
return
DO signal
Limit switch
HEND,*ALM/
LS/
*ALM/ MANU/
SV,*ALM/
SV
AUTO Positioning
HEND,SV
PE

Double
solenoid is
selected

Single
solenoid is
selected





PIO pattern 1
Change travel speed

Double
solenoid is
selected

Single
solenoid is
selected






Double
solenoid is
selected

Single
solenoid is
selected





PIO pattern 2
Position data change
PIO pattern 3
Movement by 2 inputs
among 3 points
PIO pattern 4
Movement by 3 inputs
among 3 points


PIO pattern 5
Continuous
back-and-forth
operation













For details on each setting item, refer to “ASEP/PSEP/DSEP Operation Manual” and “MSEP Operation
Manual”.
85
6. Initial Setting and Position Data Editing for SEP Controllers
PIO pattern 0
Standard movement
between 2 points
6.2 Editing Position Data
6.2.1 Online Mode
In this mode, data is read from the controller and edited.
The window is different according to each operation pattern.
6. Initial Setting and Position Data Editing for SEP Controllers
button.
Click Position from the main menu and select Edit/Teach, or click the
In the axis selection window, select the axis number corresponding to the position data you want to edit. Refer
to 4, “Selecting an axis.”
If the position data edit password is not “0000,” the input password window appears. Enter the password.
* The factory-set password is “0000.” If the factory-set password is valid, the input password window does not
appear.
Fig. 6.8 Input Password Window
86
To change the password, perform the operations explained below.
[How to Set Password for Edit Position Data Window]
[1] Click Parameter from the main menu, and then select Edit.
[2] In the axis selection window, select the axis number corresponding to the parameters you want to edit.
(Refer to 4, “Selecting an Axis.)
[3] Enter the password in the input password window. (The factory-set password is “0000.”)
[4] Set the password under the Parameter No. 20, “Position data edit password.”
[5] Click Parameter from the main menu, and then select Send to Controller.
[6] When the axis selection window appears, select the axis number of the controller to send the parameter(s)
to.
(Refer to 4, “Selecting an Axis.”)
[7] When OK is clicked in the axis selection window, the following warning window appears. Click Yes, and
the parameters will be sent to the controller.
Fig. 6.10 Warning
87
6. Initial Setting and Position Data Editing for SEP Controllers
Fig. 6.9 Edit Parameter Window
[8] After the parameters have been sent, a confirmation window appears asking if you want to restart the
controller (execute a software reset). Click Yes to execute a software reset.
6. Initial Setting and Position Data Editing for SEP Controllers
Fig. 6.11 Confirmation Window for Restarting Controller
[9] Once a password has been set, you must enter the password to edit position data.
88
In the position data edit window, you can create position data by “MDI (Mathematical Direct Input),” “Direct
Teaching,” “Jogging” or “Inching” operation.
Created/edited position data will become effective after it has been sent to the controller.
To send position data to the controller, click Position from the main menu and then select Send to Controller,
or click
in the position data edit window.
You can also check the teaching positions by “Positioning” operations.
The position data edit window varies depending on the operation pattern (PIO pattern).
(Note) If Operation Pattern 6: Positioner Mode is selected in MSEP Controllers, 256 points of position data can
be established.
“Position Name” in the window changes to “Position Number” and 0 to 255 are shown.
The input range of each
item is shown.
Fig. 6.12 Edit Position Data Window (Detailed Online View): Display Example for Operation Pattern 0
(Note) While the edit position data window is open in the online mode, the edit parameter window cannot be
opened for the same axis. (You can open the parameter edit window for a different axis.)
(Note) You cannot write data to the controller, perform jogging or home return, or carry out certain other
operations when the MANU operation mode selected in the main window is monitor mode 1 or monitor
mode 2.
Clicking either the
or
button opens a confirmation window
with the message, “Data editing is prohibited while not in a MANU teaching mode. Do you want to switch the
MANU operation mode?” Click Yes, and the current MANU operation mode will change to the applicable
teaching mode.
Monitor mode 1 will change to teaching mode 1.
Monitor mode 2 will change to teaching mode 2.
89
6. Initial Setting and Position Data Editing for SEP Controllers
If the data originally read has been
modified, “Modified” is shown.
* The input range is determined by the
applicable soft limit parameters.
(Refer to 8, “Editing Parameters.”)
How the respective buttons and input areas are operated is explained below.
(1) Tool buttons
[1] [2] [3]
[4]
[5]
[6] [7]
[8]
Fig. 6.14 Tool Buttons
6. Initial Setting and Position Data Editing for SEP Controllers
[1] Save to file
Save data to a file.
[2] Send to controller
Send (write) data to the controller.
[3] Read position data again
Read position data from the controller again, and then refresh the data display.
If position data has been modified in the edit window (= “Modified” is shown in the status bar), the warning
message shown in Fig. 6.15 appears.
* Take note that selecting Yes will clear the data that has been edited (but not yet written to the controller).
Fig. 6.15 Warning Message
[4] Print
Output position data to the printer.
The print setup window appears where you can set the top,
left and row margins (in mm) as well as print orientation.
When all settings are complete, click Print.
[5] Cut
Cut the data inside the range selected in the position data input area.
* Data can be selected in units of rows.
[6] Copy
Copy the data inside the range selected in the position data input area.
* Data can be selected in units of rows.
Fig. 6.16 Print Setting Window
[7] Paste
Paste the data that has been cut or copied from the position data input area, to the selected position.
[8] Show status monitor window
Show the status monitor window of the axis you are currently editing.
The window displayed by clicking this button is the same as the one that appears when you click Monitor
from the main menu in the main window and then select Status.
90
(2) Current position/alarm code
The current position of the axis you are editing (unit: mm) and the associated alarm code, if any, are shown.
Fig. 6.17 Current Position/Alarm Code
For emergency stop, “Emergency stop” is displayed on the current position and alarm code displaying part.
Fig. 6.18 Emergency Stop Indication
Fig. 6.19 Motor Voltage Low Indication
* When the motor voltage low is displayed, it means a state that the motor drive power is shut off.
(3) Jogging/Inching operation controls
Select Jog or Inc. (by adding a check mark to the corresponding checkbox) and use the [Fw (+)] [Bw (-)]
buttons to move the axis.
Select the jogging speed from “1,” “10,” “30,” “50” and “100” [mm/sec] using the track bar.
In the inching mode, select the feed pitch from “0.03,” “0.10” and “0.50” [mm] using the applicable radio button.
A click will move the axis by the specified pitch, while holding down the mouse button will cause the axis to jog
at 1 mm/sec after 2 second. If the mouse button is held continuously, the jogging speed will increase from
“10” to “30” and to “100” [mm/sec] every second.
If home return has been completed, clicking Teach will load the current position to the point data input area.
* In the position data input area, the loaded data will be input to the row where the cursor is located. Check the
cursor position before clicking Teach.
Track bar
Checkbox
Radio buttons
Fig. 6.20 Jogging/Inching Operation Controls
91
6. Initial Setting and Position Data Editing for SEP Controllers
When motor voltage lowers, “Motor volt. low” is displayed on the current position and alarm code displaying
part.
(4) Positioning (test operation mode)
You can move the axis to the position corresponding to the cursor row in the position data input area.
The moving speed is calculated by multiplying the speed set in the position data input area with the speed
factor. (The speed factor can also be set by the track bar.)
6. Initial Setting and Position Data Editing for SEP Controllers
Speed factor
Track bar
Step, continue and stop
buttons from the left
Fig. 6.21 Positioning
Use the
(step move) button to move the actuator by one position, or use the
(continuous move) button
to move the actuator continuously by looping a series of successive positions.
Click the
(stop) button to stop the actuator. (The actuator starts decelerating the moment the button is
clicked, and continues to decelerate until it stops.)
* If the data loaded from the controller has been changed, write the modified data again to the controller
beforehand.
* While this mode is active, data cannot be entered in the jogging/inching control groups or point data input
area.
● If the MANU operation mode is set to teaching mode 1 (safety speed effective), the maximum speed is
limited to the safety speed set by the applicable parameter.
92
(5) Servo, Home and Alarm buttons
Fig. 6.22 Servo, Home and Alarm Buttons
[2] Home button
This button lets you perform home return.
Once home return is complete, a green lamp will illuminate on the button.
[3] Alarm button
This button lets you reset an alarm.
Note that an alarm can be reset only when the servo is off and the cause of the alarm has been
removed.
While an alarm is present, a red lamp remains lit on the button.
93
6. Initial Setting and Position Data Editing for SEP Controllers
[1] Servo button
This button lets you turn on/off the servo.
When the servo is on, a blue lamp illuminates on the button.
After home return, you can turn off the servo, move the actuator manually and then click Teach to
capture a desired position.
(6) Position input area
Set the position data needed to operate the actuator.
Forward position
Backward position
Center position
Motor
6. Initial Setting and Position Data Editing for SEP Controllers
Actuator
Fig. 6.23 Position Data Input Area
[1] Position ····················Set the position to move the actuator to.
Operation pattern
Move
Standard move between 2 points: 0
Speed change: 1
Position data change: 2
Move among 3 points with 2 inputs: 3
Move among 3 points with 3 inputs: 4
Move between 2 points
Move between 2 points
Move between 2 points
Move between 3 points
Move between 3 points
Move between 2 points
Continuous back-and-forth operation: 5
Forward position






Set position
Backward position






Center position


[2] Speed ······················Set the actuator speed.
[3] Push power ···············Set a desired current-limiting value (%) other than 0 when performing push
operation. If 0 is set, positioning operation will be performed.
[4]
Push band ················Except for CON method pressing in Fieldbus Type MSEP Controllers, the band for
the pressing operation up to the movement target position is to be set.
Push operation will start from the position forward of the target position of move
(forward position or backward position) by the distance corresponding to the push
band.
Position at which the push position is
deemed complete after contacting the load
Speed
Load
Start position of
push operation
94
Push band
Target position
If CON method pressing is selected in MSEP Controllers, the maximum pressing
amount in the pressing operation from the target position needs to be defined in
Positioner Mode.
While considering the mechanical inconsistency of the work piece, set the
positioning band so the positioning would not end before the work piece gets
pressed towards the target.
Position at which the position complete
signal turns ON when the actuator contacts
work part and push completion is judged
Work
part
Positioning band
(maximum push amount)
[5] ACC ························Set the actuator acceleration.
The input range permits entry of a value greater than the value specified in the
catalog. However, you should set a value not exceeding the rated acceleration in
the catalog.
[6] DCL·························Set the actuator deceleration.
The input range permits entry of a value greater than the value specified in the
catalog. However, you should set a value not exceeding the rated deceleration in
the catalog.
[7] Energy-saving Mode… When 1 “Enable” is set in the Energy-saving Mode field, the actuator will turn OFF
the servo automatically after elapse of a specified time. Since the holding current
does not flow while the actuator is stopped, the current consumption can be saved.
Once a move command is issued, the servo will turn ON again and the actuator
will start moving.
Move command
Servo status
Servo automatically turned
OFF (Green LED blinking)
Servo ON
Actuator move
Target position
T: Delay after completion of positioning
until servo OFF (sec)
T is set by a parameter.
The time until the servo turns OFF is set by the parameter for auto servo OFF delay time.
95
6. Initial Setting and Position Data Editing for SEP Controllers
Target
position
When changing the speed in operation pattern (PIO pattern) 1, set the position at which to change the speed,
and new speed, in addition to position data.
6. Initial Setting and Position Data Editing for SEP Controllers
Fig. 6.24 Position Data Input Area: Operation Pattern 1
[8]
Speed Chg Pos··········Set the position at which to switch the speed while the actuator is moving to the
forward position or backward position.
[9]
Speed Chg Vel···········Set the speed to change to.
When changing the position data in operation pattern (PIO pattern) 2, set the position data to be changed
at the forward or backward, in addition to the forward position or backward position data.
 When CN1 (operation switching signal) is OFF, the forward position data corresponds to Forward
Position 1.
When this signal is ON, the forward position data corresponds to Forward Position 2.
 When CN1 (operation switching signal) is OFF, the backward position data corresponds to Backward
Position 1.
When this signal is ON, the backward position data corresponds to Backward Position 2.
Fig. 6.25 Position Data Input Area: Operation Pattern 2
96
6.2.2 Offline Mode
When editing data after creating new data or loading data from a file, you are editing the data in the offline
mode.
In this mode, the window controls relating to axis operation are grayed out, and only the tool buttons and
position data input area become active. Items that cannot be operated offline are grayed out.
(1) Creating new position data
To create new position data, click File from the main menu, and then select New.
[1] When the position data format selection window appears, select the controller whose position data you
want to create, and then click OK.
[2] The IO pattern select window appears.
Select the operation pattern in which to create new position data.
Fig. 6.27 IO Pattern Select Window
97
6. Initial Setting and Position Data Editing for SEP Controllers
Fig. 6.26 Position Data Format Selection Window
6. Initial Setting and Position Data Editing for SEP Controllers
[3] The position data input window corresponding to the selected operation pattern appears.
Enter desired position data in the position data input area.
Fig.6.28 Position Data Edit Window (Offline Mode – New)
[4] The created position data can be saved to a file or sent to the connected controller.
(Saving the position data to a file)
To save the position data to a file, click the tool button
.
The save as window appears.
Enter a desired file name and click the Save button, and the position data will be saved to a file under the
specified name.
Fig.6.29 Position Data Edit Window (Offline Mode – New)
(Sending the position data to the connected controller)
Connect the controller and PC.
Click Position and select Send to Controller, or click the tool button
.
When the axis selection window appears, select the axis number of the controller to send the position data to.
(Refer to 4, “Selecting an Axis.”)
* “Comments” can be saved only to files. They cannot be saved to controllers.
98
[5] Reading a File
To read position data from a file, click File and then select Open to open the “Open” window. Alternatively,
you can click File, point to Send to Controller and then select Position to open the “Open” window.
Select folder in which
position data is saved.
Saved file name
Fig. 6.30 “Open” Window
Select (click) “File name” you want to open, and click Open on the “Open” window, then the position data edit
window is displayed.
99
6. Initial Setting and Position Data Editing for SEP Controllers
Select controller.
Tool buttons
6. Initial Setting and Position Data Editing for SEP Controllers
Position data input area
Fig. 6.31 Position Data Edit Window (Offline Mode)
The edited position data can be saved to a file or sent to the connected controller.
(Saving the position data to a file)
To save the position data to a file, click the tool button
.
The save as window appears.
Enter a desired file name and click the Save button, and the position data will be saved to a file under the
specified name.
Fig. 6.32 Save As Window
(Sending the position data to the connected controller)
Connect the controller and PC.
Click Position and select Send to Controller, or click the tool button
.
When the axis selection window appears, select the axis number of the controller to send the position data to.
(Refer to 4, “Selecting an Axis.”)
* “Comments” can be saved only to files. They cannot be saved to controllers.
100
7.
ELECYLINDER Simple Data Setting
Position data can be edited online or offline.
7.1 Online Mode
This mode reads data from the controller to edit.
Click Position and then select Edit/Teach from the main menu, or click
in the toolbar.
When the position edit password is set to other than ‘0000’, the password input window will appear. Input the
password.
Fig. 7.1 Input Password Window
Simple Data Setting window will be shown.
Fig.7.2 Simple Data Setting Window
101
7. ELECYLINDER Simple Data Setting
If it is necessary to change the position edit
password, conduct the process explained in
[How to Set Password for Position Data Edit
Window] in the next page.
[How to Set Password for Position Data Edit Window]
[1] From the main menu, click Setup and then select Setting of application.
Click the Change Password button.
7. ELECYLINDER Simple Data Setting
Fig. 7.3 Setting of Application Window
[2] Select the Position data edit password, and then click the OK button.
Fig. 7.4 Select Password Window
[3] Enter the current password, new password, and new password again (for confirmation), and then click the
OK button.
Once the new password has been set, you must enter the new password to edit position data.
Fig. 7.5 System Password Window
102
In Simple Data Setting window, setting of the operational conditions (velocity, acceleration / deceleration and
pressing force) and position setting (forward end, backward end and pressing start point) can be conducted
and also display of the current position, cycle time and setting dialog, and manual operation can be conducted.
The operational condition data and the position setting data set in this window should be activated after it is
transferred to the controller.
Conduct either operation from the followings in order to transfer the data.
[1] Click Transfer button in the bottom right of the window.
[2] Click
icon in the top left.
[3] Select [Position] -> [Transfer to Controller] from the main menu.
(1) Toolbar buttons
(2) Op. condition
(1)Toolbar buttons
(3) Position setting
(4) Manual Mode
(5) Transfer Button
Fig. 7.6 Features of Simple Data Setting Window
It is also necessary to transfer data to the controller when manual operation is to be conducted.
103
7. ELECYLINDER Simple Data Setting
(6)
Transfer Log
The operating methods of buttons and input controls available in this window are explained below.
(1) Toolbar buttons
[1] [2] [3] [4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
Fig. 7.7 Toolbar in Simple Data Setting Window
[1] Save to file
Displayed data gets saved in a file.
7. ELECYLINDER Simple Data Setting
[2] Send to controller
Send (write) data to the controller.
[3] Reload position data
Data display will be updated after all the data in the screen gets
reloaded from the controller.
[4] Print
Output data to the printer.
Printout setting window appears. Setting of margins on top, left
and between lines (mm) and direction of printing can be adjusted.
Click Print button to start printing.
[5] Unit Change
The unit of the setting items and displayed items can be switched
over as shown below.
Velocity
: % ⇔ mm/s
ACC / DCL : % ⇔ G
Push power : % ⇔ N (Reference)
[6] Load Setting
Payload setting window is displayed.
[7] Test run
Trial Operation Window is displayed.
104
Fig. 7.8 Print Setting Window
(2) Op. condition, (3) Position setting
[Positioning Operation]
[1]
[6]
[4]
[3]
[5]
[2]
Fig. 7.9 Positioning Operation Setting Items
[1] Push Select-------------------
If there is no check mark (9) in the check box (…) for pressing operation,
positioning operation will be performed.
[2] Position setting [mm] -------
Position of the backward end and forward end can be input.
It is the coordinate of positioning and should be the position from the
home to be input.
The unit is mm, and a number can be input down to two decimal places.
[3] Velocity [% or mm/s] -------
Setup of positioning operation velocity can be conducted.
Set a number between 0% and 100%.
The unit can be switched with Unit Change button to mm/s unit.
For mm/s unit, a number can be input down to two decimal places.
* Note 1 Calculate the minimum velocity using the following formula.
Minimum Velocity [mm/s] = Lead Length [mm] / 800 / 0.001 [sec]
[4] ACC [% or G] ----------------
Setup of acceleration at start of operation can be conducted.
Set a number between 0% and 100%.
The unit can be switched with Unit Change button to G unit.
For G unit, a number can be input down to two decimal places.
[5] DCL [% or G]-----------------
Setup of deceleration at stop of operation can be conducted.
Set a number between 0% and 100%.
The unit can be switched with Unit Change button to G unit.
For G unit, a number can be input down to two decimal places.
[6] Cycle time [s]-----------------
Cycle time can be figured out from the setting velocity, acceleration and
deceleration, and displayed.
105
7. ELECYLINDER Simple Data Setting
[2]
[Pressing Operation]
[1]
[4]
[6]
[3]
[5]
7. ELECYLINDER Simple Data Setting
[2]
[2]
Fig. 7.10 Pressing Operation Setting Items
[1] Push Select-------------------
If there is a check mark (9) in the check box (…) for pressing operation,
pressing operation will be performed.
[2] Position setting [mm] -------
Setting of the operation start point (backward end or forward end) and the
pressing start point can be conducted.
It is the coordinate of positioning and should be the position from the
home to be input.
The unit is mm, and a number can be input down to two decimal places.
[3] Velocity [% or mm/s] -------
Setup of the operation velocity from the operation start point (backward
end or forward end) to the pressing start point can be conducted.
Set a number between 0% and 100%.
The unit can be switched with Unit Change button to mm/s unit.
For mm/s unit, a number can be input down to two decimal places.
* Note 1 Calculate the minimum velocity using the following formula.
Minimum Velocity [mm/s] = Lead Length [mm] / 800 / 0.001 [sec]
[4] ACC [% or G] ----------------
Setup of acceleration at start of operation can be conducted.
Set a number between 0% and 100%.
The unit can be switched with Unit Change button to G unit.
For G unit, a number can be input down to two decimal places.
[5] DCL [% or G]-----------------
Setup of the operation deceleration from the operation start point to the
pressing start point can be conducted.
Set a number between 0% and 100%.
The unit can be switched with Unit Change button to G unit.
For G unit, a number can be input down to two decimal places.
[6] Push Power [% or N] -------
Setting of the pressing torque (current limit) can be conducted in %.
The pressing velocity should be 20mm/s.
If the velocity is set to 20mm/s or less, pressing operation will be
performed in the setting velocity.
The unit can be switched with Unit Change button to N (Reference) unit.
106
(4) Manual Mode
(JOG operation)
[3]
[2]
[4]
[1]
Fig. 7.11 Manual Operation Display, Operation Buttons
The current position should be displayed.
[2] B.End button ----------------
Click this button and the actuator moves towards the backward end.
The operation stops if stop clicking or LS Signal of the backward end
turns on.
[3] F.End button ----------------
Click this button and the actuator moves towards the forward end.
The operation stops if stop clicking or LS Signal of the forward end turns on.
(Note) Operation is available when the backward button and forward button are activated in green. If they
are not in green, the setting parameters are not yet transferred. Transfer the setting parameters to
the controller with (5) Transfer Button in advance.
(5) Transfer Button
[4] Transfer Button ------------
The data which a change has been made to the setting can be transferred.
(6) Transfer Log
30
60
30
0.572
30
50
30
0.620
30
75
30
0.536
30
30
30
0.856
Fig. 7.12 Transference History Display
Make a change to the operational condition (velocity, acceleration / deceleration or pressing force) on either
the way forward or backward and transfer the data to the controller, and the old parameter settings will be
displayed in the previous setting lines and the new parameter settings in the current setting lines, and the cycle
time figured out from these settings will also be displayed.
In case that the pressing operation is selected in the operational condition, the previous setting and the current
setting are not to be displayed.
107
7. ELECYLINDER Simple Data Setting
[1] Current Position [mm]------
[Reference] Here in below, explains acceleration. The idea is the same for deceleration.
1G = 9800mm/s2: Acceleration can be performed with 9800mm/s in 1 second
0.3G: 9800mm/s in 1 second × 0.3 = Acceleration can be performed with 2940mm/s
Velocity
9800mm/s
1G
2940mm/s
0.3G
1s
Time
7. ELECYLINDER Simple Data Setting
Fig. 7.13 ACC
Caution: Consider to decrease the acceleration / deceleration in case of any impact or vibration being
applied to an actuator or a workpiece.
Continuing operation in such a condition will shorten the life of the actuator drastically.
108
7.2 Offline Mode
When editing data after creating loading data from a file, you are editing the data in the offline mode.
When this mode is activated, parts related to axis operation will not function, and only the tool buttons and
simple data setting part will be valid. Items that cannot be operated offline are grayed out.
7.2.1 Creating New Position Data
It is not available to create a new file.
7.2.2 Reading a File
To read position data from a file, click File and then select Open to open the “Open” window. Alternatively, you
can click File, point to Send to Controller and then select Position to open the “Open” window.
Select folder in which
position data is saved.
Saved file name
Position Data for ELECYLINDER(*.ptec)
Select controller.
Fig. 7.14 “Open” Window
Select (click) “File name” you want to open, and click Open on the “Open” window, then the simple data setting
window is displayed.
Operating condition and position setting can be edited offline.
Fig. 7.15 Simple Data Setting Window (Offline Mode)
109
7. ELECYLINDER Simple Data Setting
Axis03.ptec
The edited operating condition and position setting can be saved to a file or sent to the connected controller.
(Saving the position data to a file)
To save the position data to a file, click the tool button
.
The save as window appears.
Enter a desired file name and click the Save button, and the position data will be saved to a file under the
specified name.
7. ELECYLINDER Simple Data Setting
Axis03.ptec
Position Data for ELECYLINDER(*.ptec)
Fig. 7.16 Save As Window
(Sending the position data to the connected controller)
Connect the controller and PC.
Click Position and select Send to Controller, or click the tool button
.
When the axis selection window appears, select the axis number of the controller to send the position data to.
(Refer to 4, “Selecting an Axis.”)
* “Comments” can be saved only to files. They cannot be saved to controllers.
110
8.
Editing Parameters
To load parameter data from the controller, click Parameter (P) and then select Edit (E) from the main menu,
in the toolbar. In the “Select axis number” window, select the axis number corresponding to the
or click
axis whose parameters you want to edit. (Refer to 4, “Selecting an Axis.”)
* On the versions V7.0.3.0 or later, the default password is “0000”, so the input password window will not
appear.
* On the versions V7.00.1.00/V7.00.2.00, the default password is “5119.” Enter “5119” and click the OK button.
Fig. 8.1 Input Password Window
To change the password, perform the operations explained below.
[How to Set Password]
[1] From the main menu, click Setting and then select Application.
Click the Change Password button.
[2] If you are using a CON controller, select “System Password” and then click the OK button.
This window does not appear if you are using a SEP controller.
Fig. 8.3 Select Password Window
[3] Enter the current password, new password, and new password again (for confirmation),
and then click the OK button.
Once the new password has been set, you must enter the new password to edit parameter data.
Fig. 8.4 System Password Change Window
111
8. Editing Parameters
Fig. 8.2 Setting of Application Window
To read a parameter from the file, click File and then select Open to display a “File open” window. Or click File,
point to Send to controller and then select Parameter, to display the “Open” window.
Select folder in which
parameter data is saved.
8. Editing Parameters
Saved file name.
Select controller.
Fig. 8.5 “Open” Window
Select (click) “File name” you want to open, and click Open on the “File Open” window, then the parameter edit
window is displayed.
You can load data from the controller or a file and edit the loaded data.
Fig. 8.7 is a display example when the PCON-CY controller is connected.
You can also print the loaded data.
Edited data can be sent to the controller or saved to a file.
Edited parameters that have been sent to the controller will become effective after the controller power is
reconnected.
To send data to the controller, click Parameter and then select Send to Controller from the main menu, or
in the toolbar of the parameter edit window.
click
112
To send parameter read from the file to the controller, click Parameter and then select Send to controller, or
button on the parameter edit window.
click the
Select axis number window is displayed, then select axis No. of the controller.
(Refer to “4. Selecting an axis.”)
Click OK on the select axis number window, then the following warning window is displayed. Click Yes, then
the parameter is sent to the controller.
Fig. 8.6 Warning
8. Editing Parameters
Fig. 8.7 Parameter Edit Window
The contents of display may be different depending on the controller model type.
Note: While the position data edit window is open, the parameter edit window cannot be opened.
button is clicked, the select axis number window is displayed, but axis to be selected is
When the
not displayed.
113
ELECYLINDER Parameter Setting Window
In the ELECYLINDER parameter setting window, an explanation of the setting items will be shown in the
bottom of the window.
Also, for the items to select a value, click on the right of the item and the candidate list will be shown in
pulldown. Select a candidate and click it.
8. Editing Parameters
Pulldown List
Explanation of Item
Fig. 8.8 Parameter Setting Window (ELECYLINDER)
Depending on the controller model, a confirmation window (Fig. 8.9) may be displayed after parameters have
been sent to the controller, asking if you want to restart the controller (execute a software reset).
(This window appears only when the controller to which data has been written supports the software reset
function. (Except RCP, RCS and E-Con controllers.))
Fig. 8.9 Controller Restart Confirmation Window
114
 If you want to change the soft limits, set values corresponding to 0.3 mm outside of the desired effective
range.
Example 1) CON controllers and older models
To set the effective range to 0 to 80 mm
+ soft limit: 80.3
- soft limit: -0.3
Soft Limit set in controller
Approx.
0.3 mm
Effective area
Approx.
0.1 mm
Jog Increment allowable range after home return
Approx.
0.3 mm
Approx.
0.1 mm
Soft Limit set in controller
Approx.
0.1 mm
Effective area
Approx.
0.1 mm
Jog Increment allowable range after home return
 In the case of the RCP, RCS, E-Con, RCP2 and ERC controller, if the home return direction is changed, all
position data currently input will be cleared. Before changing the home return direction, therefore, back up
the data, if necessary.
 In the case of rod-type actuators (excluding the RCP2-RA3C, 4C and 6C), the home return direction cannot
be reversed only by changing the factory-set parameter.
Note: After parameters have been changed, reconnect the controller power or execute a software reset (if the
controller supports the software reset function).
Parameters will be rewritten simply by turning the emergency stop switch or PORT switch to OFF and
then ON again, but the new value may not become effective depending on the parameter.
115
8. Editing Parameters
Example 2) SEP controllers
To set the effective range to 0 to 80 mm
soft limit: 80.0
9.
Monitoring
Various statuses, controller error lists, and velocity/current waveforms (other than RCP, RCS and E-CON
models), can be monitored.
9.1 Status Monitor Window
To monitor various statuses, click Monitor and then select Status in the main menu, or click
in the toolbar.
In the “Select axis number” window, select the axis number corresponding to the axis whose statuses you want
to monitor. (Refer to 4, “Selecting an Axis.”) (Fig. 9.1 shows an example of the display when a PCON-C
controller is connected. Fig. 9.7 shows an example of the display when a RCP2 controller is connected. Fig.
9.8 is an example of display when ELECYLINDER is connected. The displayed information will vary depending
on the controller type.)
9. Monitoring
[In the case of PCON, ACON, DCON, SCON, ERC2, ERC3, ROBONET, ASEP, PSEP, DSEP, MSEP,
MSCON and MCON]
 MANU: Status (MANU or AUTO) of the manual
Axis status
switch is displayed. Even some machine types
 Location
which are not equipped with manual switch, such
 Speed (moving speed)
as PCON-CY, indicate MANU.
 Alarm code
 Emergency stop, motor voltage low indication
Internal flags
* As shown in Fig. 9.5 and 9.6, this is displayed
 Power: Main controller power ON/OFF status
in the case of emergency stop and motor
 Servo: Servo command status
voltage low. Motor voltage low means a status
 Home Cmplt: Home return completion flag
in which the motor drive source is shut off.
ON/OFF status
 Run: Actual servo status
 Home check sensor: Indicates that the home
check sensor is ON. This is displayed when the
actuator is provided with a home check sensor.
Inputs
Outputs
The ON/OFF status of each PIO input port is shown.
The ON/OFF status of each PIO output port is shown.
(Note) The status monitor window cannot be displayed for SCON-CB□F, CGB□F, LC□F and LCG□F equipped
with the servo pressing feature.
The display of those such as the axis status is to be shown in the pressing program operation / monitor
window.
[Refer to 15.2.3 Press Program Operation / Monitor Window]
(Note) For a controller equipped with PLC feature such as SCON-LC/LCG, the internal resister for axis
operation is displayed for the input and output. It may be different from the status of the I/O signal
communicating directly with the host PLC as it does not display it.
Also, even though the internal relay (M) assigned to the input and output will not be updated when the
ladder program is stopped, the monitor display of input and output will be updated.
116
Indication ON/OFF button (axis status, internal flags, current, input, output, special input port)
I/O Test button
Indicates ratio to the present current command
and rated value.
* With the pulse motor type, the command
value reflects the compensation for motor
ripple. In other words, the “Cur. cmnd” value
may become greater than the “Cur. Ratio”
value depending on the motor type.
Indicates status of mode SW etc.
(Indicated content depends on machine type.)
Note) The following outputs are not shown even
when the controller supports these
functions:
 Emergency stop
 Moving
 Battery alarm
Overload level is displayed with %. Reach 100% and the overload error will be issued (Error Code 0E0). If
a value smaller than 100% is set to the overload level ratio [%] in Parameter No. 143 of SCON-CA,
SCON-CAL/CGAL, SCON-CB, PCON-CA, PCON-CB, ACON-CA, ACON-CB, DCON-CA, DCON-CB,
ERC3, MSCON and MCON, an alarm is generated when it reaches that value.
Fig. 9.1 Axis Status Monitor Window (Force Control Function Not Supported)
* Output port number is displayed in the version V10.00.00.00 and later.
The background color is yellow-green only in “ON” display.
117
9. Monitoring
The currently selected PIO pattern number is displayed only when the controller supports the “PIO pattern
selection function” (parameter).
* The displayed input and output port names will vary depending on the value set in the PIO pattern
selection parameter.
The link status should be displayed if connection is established with the host controller such as PLC in the field
network.
Fig. 9.2 is an example of MECHATROLINK-I and II.
The display will be shown with white for the background and black for the letters when connection is
established with the host controller such as PLC.
6)
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
7)
9. Monitoring
Status of Network Link
Fig. 9.2 Axis Status Monitor Window (Field Network Type)
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
Type
: The type of the network such as MECHATROLINK-I and II which is under
connection is displayed.
Address
: Items such as node address are displayed.
Baudrate
: Baud rate is displayed.
Mode
: Operation mode of the controller such as Remote I/O and Simple Direct Mode is
displayed.
MAC address : MAC address is displayed for those such as EtherNet.
For the field network connection, the input port is shown for 6) Input Data in Remote I/O Mode.
The control signal is displayed in a mode such as Remote I/O Mode.
The output port is shown for 7) Output Data in Remote I/O Mode.
The status signal is displayed for Simple Direct Mode.
118
On models supporting the force control function, Force FB and Calibration are displayed.
(Note) These items are displayed only on SCON-CA (of Version V8.00.00.00 or later), SCON-CB controllers.
119
9. Monitoring
Fig. 9.3 Axis Status Monitor Window (Force Control Function Supported)
9. Monitoring
DO output test button
Clicking the DO output button opens the I/O Test window.
Here, you can click a desired port and add a check mark to forcibly turn ON the applicable signal.
Fig. 9.4 DO Test Window
Fig. 9.5 Emergency Stop Indication
Fig. 9.6 Motor Voltage Low Indication
120
[In the case of RCP, RCS, E-Con, RCP2 and ERC]
Axis status
‚ Location
‚ Speed (moving speed)
‚ Alarm code
Inputs
The ON/OFF status of each PIO input port is shown.
Internal flags
‚ Power :
Main controller power ON/OFF
status
‚ Servo :
Servo command status
‚ Home Cmplt : Home return complete flag ON/OFF
‚ Run :
Actual servo status
Outputs
The ON/OFF status of each PIO output port is shown.
Indication ON/OFF button (axis status, internal flags, input, output)
9. Monitoring
Note) The following outputs are not shown
even when the controller supports
these functions:
‚ Emergency stop
‚ Moving
‚ Battery alarm
Fig. 9.7 Status Monitor
The currently selected PIO pattern number is displayed only when the controller supports the “PIO pattern
selection function” (parameter).
* The displayed input and output port names will vary depending on the value set in the PIO pattern
selection parameter.
121
[In the case of ELECYLINDER]
Axis status
‚ Location
‚ Speed (moving speed)
‚ Alarm code
‚ Cycle time
‚ Overload level
Internal flags
‚ Power :
Main controller power ON/OFF
status
‚ Servo :
Servo command status
‚ Home Cmplt : Home return complete flag ON/OFF
‚ Run :
Actual servo status
Inputs
The ON/OFF status of each PIO input port is shown.
Outputs
The ON/OFF status of each PIO output port is shown.
Display ON/OFF Button (From left, Axis Status, Internal Flag, Current, Input and Output)
9. Monitoring
DO Output Test Button
Fig. 9.8 Status Monitor (ELECYLINDER)
Current rates to the current command value and
rating are displayed.
* For the pulse motor, as it should be the command
value to compensate the motor ripple, this value
could show a number larger than the rated
current for some motor types.
122
9.2 CTL Alarm List
To monitor the controller error list, click Monitor and then select CTL alarm list from the main menu, or click
in the toolbar. In the “Select axis number” window, select the axis number corresponding to the axis whose
controller error list you want to monitor. (Refer to 4. Selecting an Axis.)
Fig. 9.9 Controller Alarm List Window
9. Monitoring
Fig. 9.10 Controller Alarm List Window (SCON-CA, SCON-CAL/CGAL, SCON-CB, PCON-CA, PCON-CB,
ACON-CA, ACON-CB, DCON-CA, DCON-CB, ERC3 PIO Converter, MSCON and MCON)
(1) Alarm list
Indicates detected warning code, alarm codes for past 16 times (eight times on older models) and address in
which data error occurred in execution (for maker investigation), detail code and occurred time.
(Note) “Power ON log (no error)” indicates the controller power was turned on. It does not indicate an error.
The “Occurrence time” field indicates the elapsed time after the time of this “Power ON log (no error).”
(Note) The occurrence time is displayed only on SCON-CA, SCON-CAL/CGAL, SCON-CB, PCON-CA,
PCON-CB, ACON-CA, ACON-CB, DCON-CA, DCON-CB, ERC3 PIO Converter, MSEP, MSCON and
MCON controllers (Version V8.03.00.00 or later, V9.01.00.00 or later for MSEP, V9.02.00.00 or later for
MSCON, V9.07.00.00 or later for SCON-CAL/CGAL, V10.00.00.00 or later for SCON-CB, ACON-CB,
DCON-CB and MCON, V10.02.00.00 or later for PCON-CB).
(Note) For SCON-CB (servo press), when the alarm code is [094: Press Program Alarm Detected], the
contents of the detail code can be confirmed by double-clicking on the detail code part in the list.
(Software version V10.00.00.00 or later)
123
(2) Toolbar
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
Fig. 9.11 Toolbar
9. Monitoring
[1] Save as
Save the error list to a file (CSV format).
* The saved file cannot be read in this application.
[2] Print
Print the error list.
[3] Refresh
Acquire the error list from the controller again to refresh the information displayed in the window.
[4] Alarm list clear
Content of the alarm list is not deleted even if the power is turned OFF (ERC2, ERC3, SCON,
ACON, PCON, DCON, ROBONET, ASEP, PSEP, DSEP, MSEP, MSCON and MCON). For this
reason, content of the alarm list is deleted by using the alarm list clear. When the alarm list clear is
pressed, a warning in Fig. 9.12 is displayed. When Yes is clicked, the content of the alarm list is
deleted.
Fig. 9.12 Warning
124
9.3 Velocity/Current Monitor Window
To monitor velocity/current, click Monitor and then select Velocity/Current from the main menu, or click
in the toolbar. In the select axis number window, select the axis number corresponding to the axis whose
velocity/current you want to monitor. (Refer to 4. Selecting an Axis.)
is clicked.
The software will start monitoring velocity/current when
Monitor start button
Rated current ratio checkbox
9. Monitoring
Fig. 9.13 Velocity/Current Monitor Window
* The RCP, RCS, E-Con series and ELECYLINDER do not support this function.
It is supported by the RCP2, ERC, ERC2, PCON, ACON, SCON, ROBONET, ASEP, PSEP,
DSEP, MSEP, MSCON and MCON series.
(1) Current data display
[1] Current (command value) display (When the Rated current ratio checkbox is not selected)
The vertical axis represents current (command value) [mA], while the horizontal axis represents
elapsed time after the start of monitoring [100 msec].
* With the pulse motor type, the command value reflects the compensation for motor ripple. In other
words, the “Current (Command)” value may become greater than the “Rated current” value
depending on the motor type.
[2] Rated current ratio display (When the Rated current ratio checkbox is selected)
The vertical axis represents rated current ratio [%], while the horizontal axis represents elapsed time
after the start of monitoring [100 msec].
(2) Velocity data display
The vertical axis represents velocity [mm/s], while the horizontal axis represents elapsed time after the
start of monitoring [100 msec].
* Current data and velocity data are acquired from the controller at the intervals of approx. 100 msec.
(The data acquisition interval varies depending on the number of connected axes.)
Therefore, changes in current/velocity occurring within these intervals cannot be monitored accurately.
* Monitoring ends automatically as soon as the horizontal axis value reaches 65535.
125
(3) Toolbar
[1] [2]
[3] [4]
[5]
[6]
Fig. 9.14 Toolbar
[7]
[8]
[1] Save as
Save the displayed current data and velocity data to a file (CSV format).
* Only the range of data displayed in the data display area will be saved.
* The saved file cannot be read in this application.
[2] Print
Print the displayed current and velocity data.
[3] Monitor start button
Start monitoring.
9. Monitoring
[4] Monitor stop button
Stop monitoring.
[5] Vertical axis magnification change button (current)
Change the vertical axis magnification in the current data display area.
[6] Vertical axis magnification change button (velocity)
Change the vertical axis magnification in the velocity data display area.
[7] Current/speed horizontal axis record number change button
Changes horizontal axis record number of current data indicating part and speed data indicating part.
[8] Rated current ratio indicating check box
Changes data type indicated on the current data indicating part.
 When checked
Rated current ratio indication [%]
 When not checked
Current value (Command value) [mA]
126
9.4 Servo Monitor Window
(Note) This window can be displayed only on SCON-CA, PCON-CA, PCON-CB, ACON-CA, DCON-CA and
ERC3 (of Software Version V8.03.00.00 or later), SCON-CB, ACON-CB, DCON-CB, MSCON and
MCON controllers.
To monitor the amount of velocity operation, etc., click Monitor from the main menu and then select Servo
Monitor. On the axis selection window, select the target axis number. [Refer to 4, “Axis Selection.”]
Press Fixed next. (Version V9.02.00.00 or later)
Press
and monitoring starts.
Among others, the following items can be monitored:
[1] Current Position (unit: [mm] or [pls])
[2] Amount of velocity operation (unit: [mm/sec] or [pls/sec])
[3] Actual velocity instruction (unit: [mm/sec] or [pls/sec])
[4] Present speed (unit: [mm/sec]) or [pls/sec])
[5] Current instruction (unit: [mA] or [%] (percentage of the rated current))
[6] Feedback current value [mA] or [%]
[7] Force feedback data [N] (SCON-CA)
[8] Deviation (unit: [pls])
[9] Command pulse counter (unit: [pls])
9. Monitoring
Fig. 9.15 Servo Monitor Window (General) (before Version V9.02.00.00)
Fig. 9.16 Servo Monitor Window (General) (Version V9.02.00.00 or later)
127
9. Monitoring
[Servo Monitor Window for SCON-CB, ACON-CB, DCON-CB, PCON-CB and MCON (Version V10.00.00.00
and later, V10.02.00.00 or later for PCON-CB)]
 Set the trigger and monitoring can be started.
[Refer to (1) Common Buttons for how to operate]
[Refer to (4) Trigger Setting Part for how to set the trigger]
 The sampling period can be changed by the operation on the screen.
[Refer to (2) Display Settings Part]
 Left-click on the graph, and a crosshair cursor and the X coordinate and the Y coordinate values [msec] at
the clicked point are shown.
Fig. 9.17 Servo Monitor Window (General) (SCON-CB, PCON-CB, ACON-CB, DCON-CB, MCON)
128
129
9. Monitoring
[Number of channels]
The number of channels is 4 or 8. (MSCON, MCON, PCON-CB, ACON-CA, ACON-CB, DCON-CA,
DCON-CB is 2, 4 or 8.)
A desired number can be selected using user parameter No. 112, “Monitoring mode selection.”
(Setting: “0” = 0 channel (This function is not used), “1” = 4 channels, “2” = 8 channels) (MSCON,
MCON, SCON-CA, SCON-CB, PCON-CB, ACON-CA, ACON-CB, DCON-CA, DCON-CB is “3” = 2
channels.)
[Monitoring period]
For the monitoring period of ACON-CA, DCON-CA, PCON-CA, ERC3, SCON-CA, MSCON,
SCON-CB a desired value between 1 and 1,000 [msec] can be set using user parameter No. 113,
“Monitoring period.” (Setting: “1” to “1,000” [msec])
The monitoring frequency of PCON-CB, PCON-CYB, PLB, POB, ACON-CB, ACON-CYB, PLB, POB,
DCON-CB, DCON-CYB, PLB, POB, and MCON is 1 to 60000 [msec].
[Number of records that can be monitored]
When the SCON-CA, the number of records that can be monitored is 30,000 in the 4-channel mode
and 15,000 in the 8-channel mode.
When the SCON-CB, the number of records that can be monitored is 60,000 in the 2-channel mode,
30,000 in the 4-channel mode and 15,000 in the 8-channel mode.
When the MSCON, the number of records that can be monitored is 30,000 in the 2-channel mode,
15,000 in the 4-channel mode and 7,500 in the 8-channel mode.
When the PCON-CA and ERC3, the number of records that can be monitored is 3,072 in the
2-channel mode, 1,536 in the 4-channel mode and 768 in the 8-channel mode.
When the PCON-CB, ACON-CA, ACON-CB, DCON-CA and DCON-CB the number of records that
can be monitored is 8,192 in the 2-channel mode, 4,096 in the 4-channel mode and 2,048 in the
8-channel mode.
When the MCON the number of records that can be monitored is 4,096 in the 2-channel mode, 2,048
in the 4-channel mode and 1,024 in the 8-channel mode.
When using the PCON-CYB/PLB/POB, ACON-CYB/PLB/POB and DCON-CYB/PLB/POB, the
number of records that can be monitored is 4096 in the 4-channel mode and 2048 in the 8-channel
mode.
(1) Common buttons
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
Fig. 9.18 Servo Monitor Window (Common Buttons)
(Except for SCON-CB, ACON-CB, DCON-CB, MCON)
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
9. Monitoring
[6]
[7]
[8]
Save As button
Save the monitored data to a file (*.bsmrc).
Print button
Print the graph.
Start Monitor button
Start monitoring.
End Monitor button
End monitoring.
Zoom In along Vertical Graph Axis button
Zoom in along the vertical axis of the graph.
Zoom Out along Vertical Graph Axis button
Zoom out along the vertical axis of the graph.
Zoom In along Horizontal Graph Axis button
Zoom in along the horizontal axis of the graph.
Zoom Out along Horizontal Graph Axis button
Zoom out along the horizontal axis of the graph.
[9] [3] [4]
Fig. 9.19 Servo Monitor Window (Common Buttons)
(SCON-CB, ACON-CB, DCON-CB, MCON)
[9] Trigger Start button
Press the start button and the status becomes the trigger standby, and monitoring starts
once the trigger is detected.
To start monitoring without using the trigger, press the [3] Start Monitor button. To finish
monitoring, press [4] End Monitor button.
130
(2) Display setting area
[6]
[2]
[1]
[3]
[4]
Fig. 9.20 Servo Monitor Window (Display Setting Area)
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
Show/hide selection check boxes
Selecting each check box displays a graph of the corresponding channel.
When the check box is cleared, the graph disappears.
Data type selection combo boxes
Select the type of each data you want to monitor.
Position/speed display setting radio buttons
Select the display unit of position/speed data (mm or pls).
Current display setting radio button
Select the display unit of current data ([mA] or [% of rated current]).
Show/hide sub-grid line selection check box
Selecting this check box shows sub-grid lines.
When the check box is cleared, sub-grid lines become hidden.
Fixed (Version V9.02.00.00 or later)
Determine the data type in the channel setting. After the confirmation, monitoring becomes
available.
131
9. Monitoring
[5]
[7]
9. Monitoring
Fig. 9.21 Servo Monitor Window (Display Setting Area)
(SCON-CB, ACON-CB, DCON-CB, MCON)
[7]
Sampling period setting
For SCON-CB, PCON-CB, DCON-CB and MCON, the time frequency (sampling period) to
acquire data can be changed in Display Setting Window.
The minimum settable value should be the value set in Parameter No. 113 (Monitoring
Period).
The maximum value should be the maximum value settable to Parameter No. 113
(Monitoring Period).
(Note) For the controllers other than SCON-CB, PCON-CB, DCON-CB and MCON, the
sampling period setting part is not displayed. It is necessary to change Parameter No.
113 (Monitoring Period) when it is required to change the sampling period.
132
(3) Peak value display area
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
Minimum value
The minimum value of data monitored on each channel is shown.
Maximum value
The maximum value of data monitored on each channel is shown.
Position/speed display setting radio buttons
Select the display unit of position/speed data (mm or pls).
Current display setting radio buttons
Select the display unit of current data ([mA] or [% of rated current]).
133
9. Monitoring
Fig. 9.22 Servo Monitor Window (Peak Value Display Area)
(4) Trigger Setting Part
For SCON-CB, PCON-CB, DCON-CB and MCON, trigger setting is available to start monitoring. Set the
trigger in the trigger setting part. (Version V10.00.00.00 and later)
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
9. Monitoring
Fig. 9.23 Servo Monitor Window (Trigger Setting) (Version V10.00.00.00 and later)
[1] Data types
The following data types can be selected.
 PIO signal (input) allocation (bit)
 PIO signal (output) allocation (bit)
 Clock
[2] Trigger Type
When PIO signal (input) assign (bit) or PIO signal (output) assign (bit) is selected, select either Rising
edge (bit) or Falling edge (bit).
It is not necessary to select any if Clock is selected.
[3] Assign Signals
When PIO signal (input) assign (bit) is selected, select from the PIO input port signals.
When PIO signal (output) assign (bit) is selected, select from the PIO output port signals.
It is not necessary to select any if Clock is selected.
[4] Data
When Clock is selected, the current time in the controller is shown first.
With that time as the standard, set the time that trigger is required at.
For example, if you would like to trigger in one minute, forward the minute setting for one minute.
[5] Trigger delay [sec]
In case that the data before having a trigger is required to be acquired, set the time [sec] in Trigger
delay [sec]. It enables to acquire the data before the time of trigger being conducted.
[6] Occurrence
The controller clock when trigger is conducted is displayed.
When Clock is selected, the same time as the set trigger time is displayed.
134
9.5 Maintenance information Window
(Note) This window is available only with SCON-CA, SCON-CAL/CGAL, SCON-CB, PCON-CA, PCON-CB,
ACON-CA, ACON-CB, DCON-CA, DCON-CB, ERC3, MSEP, MSCON and MCON controllers (Version
V8.03.00.00 or later, V9.01.00.00 or later for MSEP, V9.02.00.00 or later for MSCON, V9.07.00.00 or
later for SCON-CAL/CGAL, V10.00.00.00 or later for SCON-CB, ACON-CB, DCON-CB, MCON,
V10.02.00.00 or later for PCON-CB).
* Refer to the next page for ELECYLINDER.
The total number of movements of the actuator, and total distance traveled, are displayed.
 Total number of movements
The cumulative number of times the actuator has moved is displayed.
 Total distance traveled
The cumulative distance the actuator has traveled is displayed. The total
operation distance can be switched between km and m.
Display switch
between km
and m
Refreshed
data of
maintenance
information
Fig. 9.25 Maintenance information Window
m display (Except for PCON-CFA, CFB)
For PCON-CFA Controller, the following items are displayed in addition.
 Total driving time of fan
Shows the total driving time of the fan on the controller.
Fig. 9.26 Maintenance information Window
km display (PCON-CFA, CFB)
Fig. 9.27 Maintenance information Window
m display (PCON-CFA, CFB)
(1) Changing the total number of movements and total distance traveled
Set a desired value in the refreshed maintenance information data field of total number of movements or
total distance traveled, and then click Send. The total number of movements or total distance traveled, as
applicable, will be refreshed. (Password is required.)
(2) Thresholds for total number of movements and total distance traveled
You can set thresholds for total number of movements and total distance traveled so as to generate an
alarm if the thresholds are exceeded.
The thresholds you have set will be stored in the following parameters:
Parameter No.
147
148
Name
Threshold for total number of movements
Threshold for total distance traveled
135
9. Monitoring
Fig. 9.24 Maintenance information Window
km display (Except for PCON-CFA, CFB)
Alarm code
4E
4F
Message-level Alarms
Name
Movements threshold exceeded
Description
This alarm generates when the total number of
movements has exceeded the threshold set in
parameter No. 147.
Traveled distance threshold exceeded This alarm generates when the total number of
movements has exceeded the threshold set in
parameter No. 148.
For ELECYLINDER (V12.00.00.00 and later)
The total number of movements and the total driving distance should be displayed.
• Total moving count
The sum total of the number of the actuator movements should be displayed.
• Total moving distance
The sum total of the actuator driving distance should be displayed. The unit of
the total driving distance can be switched over between km and m.
9. Monitoring
Display switch between
km and m
Refreshed data of
maintenance information
Fig. 9.28 Maintenance information Window (ELECYLINDER)
[1] Change of Total Number of Movements and Total Driving Distance
Set a number to the maintenance information update data of the total number of movements or the
total driving distance and click Update button, and a change will be made to the total number of
movements or the total driving distance. (Password is required.)
[2] About Target Value for Total Number of Movements and Total Driving Distance
Set a target value other than 0 to the total number of movement and the total driving distance, and a
message level alarm (Maintenance Alert 1 / Maintenance Alert 2) will get displayed when the
number exceeds the target.
In order to set the target value, set a number to the maintenance information update data and click
Update button.
Overload Warning Load Level Ratio
With the motor raising temperature assumed to generate the overload alarm set as 100%, when the
motor temperature exceeds the rate set in this window, the LED lamp gets turned on in green as the
overload warning, and notification will be made in Maintenance Alert 3 window at the same time.
Overload warning level setting
Set a number to the maintenance information update data of the overload warning level and click
Update button, and the setting can be established.
Set it to 100, and judgement will not be conducted.
136
[Example of use for Total Drive Distance Times]
For an instance, it is recommended to have a grease supply on the scraper area every 300km in the
regular inspections when the drive distance exceeds 300km within 3 months for RCPW Rod Type
Actuator.
(Have a supply every 3 months for those which do not exceed it.)
In this case, set ‘300’ in Parameter No. 148 at the start of the first run, and an alarm notifies that grease
supply is required when the drive distance exceeds 300km.
After the grease supply, set multiple numbers of 300, such like 600, 900, in Parameter 148, and the
notification continues to be made for the timings of grease supply.
9. Monitoring
137
9.6 Gateway Data Monitor
(Note) It can be displayed only on RCP6S Gateway Unit.
Driving source consumption current should be displayed for versions from V10.02.00.00 before V11.00.00.00.
Monitoring of driving source consumption current became available from V11.00.00.00.
Select [Monitor] → [Gateway Data Monitor] in the main menu when monitoring is required.
9. Monitoring
(1) Versions from V10.02.00.00 before V11.00.00.00
Current value [A] should be displayed since the screen is turned on.
The peak values are unbuffered data acquired in the acquirement cycles (approx. 80msec) of the PC
software.
[1]
[2]
[3]
Fig. 9.29 Driving source consumption current Window
[1] Current [A]
It shows the peak values of driving source consumption current on each axis.
[2] Sum of all [A]
It shows the peak values of the total driving source consumption current on all the axes.
[3] Sum (Max) [A]
It shows the sum of peak values on all axes since the power was turned on.
Data can be cleared by pressing Reset button.
138
(2)
Versions after V11.00.00.00
A monitoring window was added on the left to show driving source consumption current.
The displays of current [A], sum of all [A] and Sum (Max) [A] are the same as those before
V11.00.00.00.
Monitoring starts by pressing the monitoring start button
.
Display of driving source consumption current also starts once the monitoring start button
pressed.
Recording can be performed for ten minutes at maximum regardless of number of axes.
[3][4]
[5]
[6]
is
[2]
[1]
[7]
9. Monitoring
Fig. 9.30 Driving source consumption current monitor Window
[1] Graph
Select the axis number to be displayed in [7] Chart. Click in a box □ at the axis number to be
monitored to put a check mark . Monitor display will be performed on the axis numbers with a
check mark .
[2] Check all / Reset all
Click Check all button and all the axis numbers will be selected. A check mark  will be put on every
axis number.
Click Reset all button and all the axis numbers will be cancelled. All the check marks  will be
removed from the axis numbers and the boxes will become blank.
[3] Monitoring Start Button
Display of monitoring and driving source consumption current gets started.
If a check mark () is put on [Clear “Sum (Max)[A]” reading when beginning monitoring], the “Sum
(Max)[A]” will be cleared before monitoring is started.
[4] Monitoring Stop Button
Monitoring gets stopped.
[5] Vertical / Horizontal Zoom-in / Zoom-out Buttons
Zooming in and out of vertical or horizontal axes continues while a buttons is held down and stops
once it is released.
139
9. Monitoring
[6] [Clear “Sum (Max)[A]” reading when beginning monitoring] Click box.
If a check mark () is put, the Sum (Max)[A] will be cleared before monitoring is started.
[7] Chart
The current [A] of the selected axis number should be displayed in waveform.
The current [A] is the drive source consumption current [A] on each axis.
Vertical axis shows the current [A] and the horizontal shows the time [msec].
The colors of the lines for the waveforms are as shown below.
140
9.7 Network Data Monitor
* Applicable versions: V11.00.00.00 and later
 This feature is not applicable for the controllers in following types.
 Multiple-axis controllers
: MCON-C/CG、MSEP-C、MSCON-C
 Controllers with PLC features : MCON-LC/LCG、MSEP-LC、SCON-LC/LCG
The data received by the host PLC and the fieldbus can be monitored when the following parameter settings
are established in the controllers applicable for the fieldbus.
Monitoring window will be closed once the software reset gets conducted while the monitoring window is in
display.
User Parameter No.
Name
Setting value (Note 1)
Fieldbus Operation Mode
84
Any number but 0
Network
Type
87
Any number but 0
Note 1 Values available for setting differ depending on controllers.
9.7.1 How to Display Monitoring Window
No.
1
2
3
4
5
Way to Display
Display from main menu in main window
Display from tree view in main window
Display from axis status window
Display from network information window
Displayed automatically if the controller is in AUTO Mode when 0A3 Error
(Position Indication Information Data Error) is occurred
141
9. Monitoring
The monitoring window can be displayed in the following way.
Also, when 0A3 Error (Position Indication Information Data Error) is occurred, the monitoring window will be
displayed automatically if the controller is in AUTO Mode.
9. Monitoring
[Display from main menu in main window]
[1] Select [Monitor] -> [Network Data Monitor] from the main menu.
(Note) It is available to select while online.
(Note) A message showing “There is no selected axis” will be displayed when controllers that are
not to be shown in the monitoring window are connected, such as a controller not applicable
for the fieldbus or a controller with the parameters in No. 84 and 87 set to 0.
Fig. 9.31 Main menu Window
[2] When there is one axis that is applicable for the fieldbus and the parameters in No. 84 and 87 are
set to a number other than 0, the monitoring window will be displayed.
When a controller possesses multiple axes, the axis select window opens.
Select axes to be shown in the monitoring window. The monitoring window gets displayed.
Fig. 9.32 Select axis number Window
142
[Display from tree view in main window]
Select the network data monitor in the tree view.
The monitoring window gets displayed.
(Note) “Network Data Monitor” will be shown in the tree view if the controller is applicable for the fieldbus.
(Note) When the parameters in No. 84 and 87 are set to 0, the monitoring window will not be displayed
even if selected.
[Display from axis status window]
Select the network monitor in the axis status window.
Select the network data monitor in the tree view.
(Note) “Network Monitor” tab will not be displayed when controllers that are not to be shown in the
monitoring window are connected, such as a controller not applicable for the fieldbus or a controller
with the parameters in No. 84 and 87 set to 0.
Fig. 9.34 Axis status monitor Window
143
9. Monitoring
Fig. 9.33 Tree view Window
9. Monitoring
[Display from network information window]
Select the network monitor in the network information window.
Select the network data monitor in the tree view.
(Note) “Network Monitor” tab will not be displayed when controllers that are not to be shown in the
monitoring window are connected, such as a controller not applicable for the fieldbus or a controller
with the parameters in No. 84 and 87 set to 0.
Fig. 9.35 Network information Window
144
9.7.2 Monitoring Window
Following monitoring windows will be displayed.
[1]
[6]
[2]
[4]
[3]
Fig. 9.36 Network Data Monitor Window
[1] Screen Caption
It is shown as Network Data Monitor [X].
In the part expressed with “X” should be replaced with the display of either the axis number, axis name or
axis number + axis name depending on the applicable controller and tool setting.
[2] Network Setting Part
Monitoring information and the setting status of the related parameters should be displayed.
No.
1
2
3
Contents
Fieldbus Operation Mode
Fieldbus Output Format
Displayed Contents
Remarks
It is not displayed in any mode except
for Semi Direct Mode
Velocity Unit in Semi Direct Mode
145
9. Monitoring
[5]
[3] Input Data Monitoring Part
Contents, values and input range of the received data (from PLC to controller) should be displayed.
The values should be displayed in the swapped form or converted unit, not in the real data forms of
the received data.
The data to be displayed should be the contents in relation to the applicable controllers and operation
modes. Refer to the sections for the input and output signal assignments in the instruction manual for
the network to be used.
In those above, the occupation information should not be displayed.
[4] Output Data Monitoring
Contents and values of the sent data (from controller to PLC) should be displayed. As well as the input
monitoring, the values should be displayed in the swapped form or converted unit.
As well as the input data monitoring part, the data to be displayed should be the contents in relation to
the applicable controllers and operation modes.
In those above, the occupation information should not be displayed.
9. Monitoring
[5] Signal Data Display Format Part
Display of the control signals and status signals can be selected from binary numbers and hexadecimal
numbers.
[6] Close Button
Click this button and this window closes.
146
10.
Setup
10.1 Setting of application Window
Click Setting from the main menu, and then select Application.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
Fig. 10.1 Setting of application Window
[2] Baud rate
is clicked, the communication baud rate the serial port list is displayed. Select baud rate
When
from the list.
* The baud rate selected here is used only in the communication between this application and
controller. It does not affect the communication speed parameters of the controller.
[3] Last axis No.
is clicked, the axis No. list is displayed. Select axis No. intended for connected axis
When
check.
* Axes of numbers greater than the value selected here will not be checked for connection. Select an
appropriate axis number after checking the axis numbers of the connected axes.
[4] Unit of display at pulse-train mode
is clicked, units of display [mm], [pulse] in pulse-train mode are displayed.
When
For pulse sequence input controller such as PCON-PL/PO, units such as the current position on the
status monitor window (Fig. 9.1) can be changed.
[5] Start position of program (V8.03.00.00 or later)
is clicked, it can be selected whether the simple program is to be started from the cursor
When
position or the top of the program.
[6] Display type of position data (V8.03.00.00 or later)
is clicked, the way to show the position data when the position data edit window is
When
displayed can be selected whether it should be shown with the simple display or normal display.
147
10. Setup
[1] Port
is clicked, the serial port list to communicate with the controller is displayed.
When
Select port from the list. If there is not check mark in the box of “Show All”, the COM ports detected
automatically are shown. With check mark, all the COM ports are shown.
[7] Input warning outside the recommended range (V8.03.00.00 or later)
is clicked, the display can be selected from show/not to show of the alarm issued when
When
the input value is out of the recommended range and may cause an abnormal noise or vibration at
the time of parameter or position data input.
[8] Servo monitor data file format (V8.03.00.00 or later)
is clicked, the file format to save the data monitored in the servo monitoring window can
When
be set.
Changing any of the items in [1] to [3] and then clicking OK will display the re-connection confirmation window
shown in Fig. 10.2. To reflect the change, click Yes to reconnect the axes.
* The change will become effective once the application is restarted or the axes are reconnected.
10. Setup
Fig. 10.2 Re-connection Confirmation Window
In the version V10.00.00.00 and later, the axis number can be displayed in the axis display in Application
Setting Window such as in the tree view.
[9]
Fig. 10.3 Setting of application Window (Axis name display setting) (Version V10.00.00.00 or later)
[9]
Axis name display setting
Press this button and Axis Display Window is displayed.
Setting for axis display shown in tree view and so on can be conducted.
148
[Axis display setting]
■ Setting details
[Axis name setting/editing]
To set or edit the axis name can be conducted by opening Axis name display setting window from the popup
menu displayed when right-clicking on the tree view in Main Window.
Fig. 10.5 Right-click axis display part in tree view in Main Window
Fig. 10.6 Axis name setting Window
The settable number of characters in the axis name is 12 in half-size font (6 in full-size font). Axis
No. will be shown when no setting is conducted.
149
10. Setup
Fig. 10.4 Axis name display setting Window
[1] Tree View with axis numbers: The way to display each
axis in the tree view in Main Window can be selected from
the Axis No., Axis name and combination with axis No..
[2] Tree View with model names: To display or hide the
controller name can be selected.
[3] Tree View with elapsed time: To display or hide the
time passed since the controller has started up can be
selected.
[4] Show Screen title axis: The way to display axis number
added in the window titles at the start of each window
such as Edit Parameter Window and Edit Position Data
Window can be selected from the axis number, axis name
and combination with axis number.
[5] Save file name initial display: The file name displayed
initially when saving files for parameters and position data
can be selected from the axis number, axis name and
combination with axis number.
In the version V10.00.00.00 and later, only in SCON-CB controller, setting to make the data acquirement of the
servo monitor in high speed is available in Application Setting Window.
By setting it in high speed, the graph display (update) in the servo monitor becomes fast.
[1]
[2]
[3]
Fig. 10.7 Application Setting Window (High-Speed Servo Monitor)
10. Setup
[1]
[2]
[3]
High accuracy PC timer: Select whether to make the timer operation in the PC to high precision
at the servo monitor startup. Have SCON-CB and the models other
than SCON-CB also set effective.
Acquisition method Monitoring data:
Select from low / mid / high speed for data acquirement at monitoring.
Setting to high speed makes the servo monitor display (update) fast.
Regardless of the setting, operation should be in low speed for the
models other than SCON-CB.
Extended time for reception completion determination:
Set it for adjustment in case standard communication cannot be held
in normal condition in the settings of [1] and [2]. (Unit is [msec].)
Make the value bigger little by little in case connection between the PC
and controller cannot be established and try to reconnect.
150
Caution:
1. Exercise precaution to the following when using the high-speed servomotor feature.
(1) When SCON-CB (controller applicable servomotor acceleration) or a controller equipped with the
gateway feature *1 is connected, servomotor acceleration cannot be utilized.
Have either [1] or [2] below conducted.
Utilizing servomotor acceleration without conducting either of them may disable normal
communication.
[1] Set the monitoring data acquirement to “Low Speed” in Application Setting. (Set the
high-speed servomotor feature invalid.)
[2] Do not attempt to connect a controller equipped with the gateway feature *1 when the
servomotor is accelerated in SCON-CB.
*1 Products equipped with gateway feature: XSEL RC Gateway, ROBONET Gateway, MSCON,
MOCON, etc.
(2) If a communication error occurs while in use of the high-speed servomotor feature, try the
following step.
Set the monitoring data acquirement to “Low Speed” in Application Setting.
(Set the high-speed servomotor feature invalid.)
2.
* By having countermeasures in [1] and [2], the communication period with a controller
becomes longer.
151
10. Setup
In cause of communication error occurrence such as “check sum error” during communication
with a controller, try following countermeasures and the situation could be improved.
[1] Change “Extended Time for Reception Completion Determination” in Application Setting
Window.
Increase the value gradually like 16, 32, 48 … to see if improvement can be confirmed.
Try [2] if no improvement can be confirmed even if increased to 128.
[2] Make “High accuracy PC timer” inactivated in Application Setting Window.
10.2 Assigning an Axis Number
To assign an axis number to any model without axis number setting rotary switches, click Setting from the
main menu and then select Controller  Addressing axis number.
Fig. 10.8 Addressing Axis Number Window
10. Setup
In the axis number assignment window (Fig. 10.8), select a desired axis number and then click OK.
When the warning window (Fig. 10.9) appears, click OK. The axis number will change.
Fig. 10.9 Warning Window
In the addressing axis number window (Fig. 10.8), click Cancel to close the window.
152
10.3 Time Setting
(Note) This setting is available only with SCON-CA, SCON-CAL/CGAL, SCON-CB, PCON-CA, PCON-CB,
ACON-CA, ACON-CB, DCON-CA, DCON-CB, ERC3 PIO Converter, (Version V8.03.00.00 or later,
Version V9.07.00.00 or later for SCON-CAL/CGAL, Version V10.00.00.00 or later for SCON-CB,
ACON-CB, DCON-CB, Version V10.02.00.00 or later for PCON-CB).
(Note) Establish the settings on Gateway Parameter Setting Tool for MSEP, MSCON and MCON.
From the main menu, click Setting, point to Controller Setup, and then select Time setting. On the axis
selection window, select the target axis number. Refer to 4, “Axis Selection.”
If a warning message appears when setting the axis number, switch the controller and PC
software settings according to the message, and then click Setting, point to Controller Setup,
and select Time setting to repeat setting from the beginning.
Fig. 10.10 Warning Message
10. Setup
[1]
[2]
[4]
[5]
[3]
Fig. 10.11 Time setting Window
[1]
[2]
Date setting area
Set the last two digits of the year (2010  “10”), month, and day.
Time setting area
Set the hours, minutes and seconds.
153
[3]
Synchronizing to PC Clock
The date and time on the PC is set to the controller.
When the setting is complete, the message “The time setting was completed” (Fig. 10.12)
appears.
Fig. 10.12 Time Setting Completion Message
10. Setup
If the setting was not successful, the message “It failed in the time setting” (Fig. 10.13) appears.
Fig. 10.13 Time Setting Failure Message
[4]
Setting button
Clicking this button sets the date and time set in [1] and [2] to the controller.
When the setting is complete, the message “The time setting was completed” (Fig. 10.14)
appears.
Fig. 10.14 Time Setting Completion Message
If the setting was not successful, the message “It failed in the time setting” (Fig. 10.15) appears.
Fig. 10.15 Time Setting Failure Message
[5]
Close button
Clicking this button closes the time setting window.
154
10.4 Load Cell Calibration
(Note) This setting is available only with SCON-CA, SCON-CB controllers (Version V8.00.00.00 or later for
SCON-CA).
From the main menu, click Setting, point to Controller Setup, and then select Load Cell Calibration. On the
axis selection window, select the target axis number. Refer to 4, “Axis Selection.”
If a warning message appears when setting the axis number, switch the controller and PC
software settings according to the message, and then click Setting, point to Controller Setup,
and select Load Cell Calibration to repeat setting from the beginning.
Fig. 10.16 Load Cell Calibration Axis Selection Window
10. Setup
155
(1) The message “Load cell calibration executing…” (Fig. 10.17) appears and the calibration is
performed.
Fig. 10.17 Load Cell Calibration In-Progress Message
(2) When the calibration is complete, the message “The load cell calibration was completed”
(Fig. 10.18) appears.
10. Setup
Fig. 10.18 Load Cell Calibration Completion Message
If the calibration was not successful, the message “It failed in the load cell calibration” (Fig.
10.19) appears. If this message appears, check the cable connection of the load cell, etc.,
and then perform the calibration again.
Fig. 10.19 Load Cell Calibration Failure Message
156
11.
Version Information
[1]
[2]
[3]
Fig. 11.1 Version Information
[1] Application version
The version of this application is shown.
[2] Version Information of each Function DLL (V8.03.00.00 or later)
In here, shows the version information of each function DLL.
Nothing will be shown if the DLL file does not exist in the same folder as the program executable file.
157
11. Version Information
[3] Controller version
The software version and manufacturing information of each connected controller are shown.
(Manufacturing information may not be displayed depending on the controller type.)
12.
Smart Tuning Function (Version V8.03.00.00 or Later)
If RC PC software (Version V8. 03. 00. 00 or later) is installed, the key file (OffBrdTune.dll file) and such as
AtrDatActuator_24V_PM_BU.oact that are required for the smart tuning function are also installed.
They are installed in the folder that the executable file for ‘RcPc PC PC software’ is stored.
Example of storage folder: C:\Program Files\IAI\RoboCylinder
DB_OFFBRD folder
PC software for RC
IAI America Inc.
RcPc
PC software for RC
Executable file
Key file
(OffBrdTune.dll file)
12. Smart Tuning Function (Version V8.03.00.00 or Later)
Fig. 12.1 Folder with RC PC Software Executable File Stored
In DB_OFFBRD folder, files listed below etc. are to be stored;
• AtrDatActuator_24V_PM_BU.oact
• DatRcrdAdjsted_24V_PM_BU.ocrd
• TblDatAdjstManuEasily.omnu
• DatLimtrAdjst.olmt
OACT file
23 KB
OLMT file
1 KB
OMNU file
3 KB
Fig. 12.2 Data Stored to DB_OFFBRD Folder
158
12.1 Restrictions
12.1.1 Actuator Applicable for Smart Tuning Function
Smart Tuning Function is available only on the actuators registered in the actuator attribute data
(AtrDatActuator_24V_PM_BU.oact etc.).
12.1.2 Parameter Setting
Smart Tuning Function is available only when the parameters are set as shown below:
[1] User Parameter No.152 High Output Setting : 1 (Enabled)
[2] User Parameter No.144 Gain scheduling Upper Limit Multiplying Ratio (%) :
100 or less (gain scheduling function inactivated)
(Note) Gain scheduling is the function to change the gain in accordance with the number of motor
rotation.
Gain scheduling function becomes activated when the value is set more than 100.
12.2 Outline of Smart Tuning Function
With the Smart Tuning Function, the following 5 operations can be performed.
[1] Setting of maximum acceleration/deceleration speed considering the indicated carrier load and velocity
[2] Setting of acceleration/deceleration speed to provide the shortest operation time figured out from the
indicated carrier load and moving distance
[3] Overshoot judgment on S motion operation
[4] Test Run
[5] Cycle time calculation
The table below shows the screens that each function can be used.
159
[5]

12. Smart Tuning Function (Version V8.03.00.00 or Later)
List of Windows Each Function is supported
Function
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
Edit Position Data Window



Test Run and Cycle Time Calculation

Operation Window
Cycle Time Calculation Window
12.2.1 Setting of maximum acceleration/deceleration speed considering the indicated
carrier load and velocity
It is the function to set the maximum acceleration/deceleration speed available at the indicated carrier load
and velocity.
12.2.2 Setting of acceleration/deceleration speed to provide the shortest operation time
figured out from the indicated carrier load and moving distance
It is the function to set the combination of velocity and acceleration/deceleration that provide the shortest
operation time for the indicated moving distance in several patterns of selectable combinations of the velocity
and acceleration/deceleration with accordance with the carrier load.
When 12.0 [Kg] is indicated for the carrier load, for an instance, the combination of the velocity and
acceleration/deceleration to provide the shortest operation time for each moving distance is as shown below:
[1] When 30.00 [mm] is indicated
 Velocity and acceleration for shortest operation time : 250.00 [mm/sec], 0.70 [G]
[2] When 40.00 [mm] is indicated
 Velocity and acceleration for shortest operation time : 300.00 [mm/sec], 0.50 [G]
(Note) The search of the combination of velocity and acceleration/deceleration for the shortest operation
time refers to the test run plan time.
For a reference, the following table shows the list of the operation time for each moving distance.
12. Smart Tuning Function (Version V8.03.00.00 or Later)
Carrier load
[Kg]
12.0
List of Operation Time for Each Moving Distance
Velocity
Acceleration/D
Travel [mm]
[mm/sec]
eceleration [G]
250.00
0.70
30.00
300.00
0.50
250.00
0.70
40.00
300.00
0.50
Operation Time
[msec]
156
161
196
195
12.2.3 Overshoot judgment on S motion operation
It is the function to judge if the indicated operation setting has the risk of overshooting.
In the S motion operation, there is a risk of overshooting in an operation setting with no enough acceleration
(deceleration) time.
To avoid this, it is necessary to judge if the time setting has a risk of overshooting or not with a calculation of
the acceleration (deceleration) time in the test run plan.
12.2.4 Test run
It is the function to have the actuator run for a trial with the indicated operation settings.
For the test run, the operation mode can be selected from trapezoid and S motion operations. Also, it is able
to check the time spent from the operation start till PEND is issued.
12.2.5 Cycle time calculation
In this, the value figured out by the cycle time calculation with the indicated operation settings can be
checked.
160
12.3 Operation in Edit position data Window
In this section, explains the following operations performed in Edit position data window.
[1] Setting of maximum acceleration/deceleration speed considering the indicated carrier load and velocity
[2] Setting of acceleration/deceleration speed to provide the shortest operation time figured out from the
indicated carrier load and moving distance
[3] Overshoot judgment on S motion operation
12.3.1 Explanation of Window Screen
(1) Edit position data Window
[1] Smart tuning
valid/Invalid changeover button
[2] Box to show actuator setting
applicable for velocity and
acceleration/deceleration
settings
[3] Box to show carrier load
setting for velocity and
acceleration/deceleration
settings
[1] Smart tuning valid/Invalid changeover button
This button can switch between valid and invalid of the smart tuning function in the position data edit
process.
When the smart tuning is set invalid, the display is turned OFF.
The display is on when the setting is valid.
When it is set invalid, the shortest smart tuning setting display area gets shaded and setting is disabled.
Fig. 12.4 Smart tuning
valid/Invalid changeover button
(Invalid)
Fig. 12.5 Smart tuning
valid/Invalid changeover button
(Valid)
161
12. Smart Tuning Function (Version V8.03.00.00 or Later)
Fig. 12.3 Overall View of Edit position data Window
Fig. 12.6 Smart Tuning Setting Window (Function Invalid)
[2] Box to show actuator setting applicable for velocity and acceleration/deceleration settings
Data type
Model
Lead
[mm]
Stroke
[mm]
Direction
Setting Actuator Button
Fig. 12.7 Box to show actuator setting applicable for velocity and acceleration/deceleration settings
Data Type (Version V9.02.00.00 or later)
Data type can be selected from the standard and the special order if there is the actuator attribute data
file for the special order.
Model
In here, shows the model code of the actuator currently set to the controller.
Lead [mm]
In here, shows the actuator lead [mm] currently set to the controller.
12. Smart Tuning Function (Version V8.03.00.00 or Later)
Stroke [mm]
In here, shows the actuator stroke [mm] currently set to the controller.
Direction
In here, shows the posture of the actuator currently set to the controller.
Setting Actuator Button
Click here and “Actuator setting for Vel and Acc setting” window (Fig. 12.9) opens.
[3] Box to show carrier load setting for velocity and acceleration/deceleration settings
Carrier load
number select
Selected carrier
load
Load Setting Button
Fig. 12.8 Box to show carrier load setting for velocity and acceleration/deceleration settings
Carrier load pattern number select
Select the carrier load to be used for the velocity and acceleration/deceleration settings.
There are 4 options from 0 to 3 available to choose from.
Selected carrier load
In here, shows the carrier load set to the carrier load pattern number selected in the carrier load pattern
number select.
Fig. 11.8 shows the case of 3.500 [Kg] being set to Carrier Load No. 0.
Load Setting Button
Click here and “Load Setting for Vel and Acc setting” window (Fig. 12.10) opens.
162
(2) Actuator setting for Vel and Acc setting
[4] Direction
[6] Cancel Button
[1] Model
[2] Lead [mm] [3] Stroke [mm] [5] Setting Button
Fig. 12.9 Actuator setting for Vel and Acc setting Window
[1] Model
Select the actuator model code that is applicable for the velocity and acceleration/deceleration settings.
(Note) The models available to select from are only the ones registered in “Actuator Attribute Data File”.
[2] Lead [mm]
Select the lead of the actuator that is applicable for the velocity and acceleration/deceleration settings.
(Note) The lead available to select from is one listed up in the selected model code.
[3] Stroke [mm]
Select the stroke of the actuator that is applicable for the velocity and acceleration/deceleration settings.
(Note) The stroke available to select from is one from the stroke range listed up in the selected model
code.
[4] Direction
Select the posture (horizontal or vertical) of the actuator that is applicable for the velocity and
acceleration/deceleration settings.
(Note) The posture that can be selected is limited only to those supported in the selected model.
[6] Cancel Button
Click this button and the window will close without writing the settings of 1) to 4) to the controller.
163
12. Smart Tuning Function (Version V8.03.00.00 or Later)
[5] Setting Button
Click this button and the settings of 1) to 4) are written to the controller and the window will close.
(3) Carrier load setting for Smart tuning function
[1] Load Setting
[2] OK Button
[3] Cancel Button
Fig. 12.10 Carrier load setting for Smart tuning function Window
[1] Load Setting
Input the carrier load to be set to Carrier Load Pattern No.0 to 3.
The range available to input is from 0 to the value of the maximum carrier load.
(Input the values in [kg] unit for the straight axis type and [kgm2] for the rotary axis.)
12. Smart Tuning Function (Version V8.03.00.00 or Later)
[2] OK Button
Click this button and the setting of 1) is written to the controller and the window will close.
[3] Cancel Button
Click this button and the window will close without writing the setting of 1) to the controller.
(Note) Even if a change is made to the carrier load settings in this window, the acceleration/deceleration
speed in the position data that is already set will not be changed to the speed suitable for the
carrier load.
164
12.3.2 Explanation of Each Operation
(1) The way to operate the maximum acceleration/deceleration speed setting function against the indicated
carrier load and velocity
[1] Click Smart tuning button to activate the smart tuning.
The display turns on and the function turns available.
[1] Smart tuning button
[2] Click Setting Actuator button at the setting display of the actuator applicable for velocity and
acceleration/deceleration settings.
Setting Actuator Button
Fig. 12.12 Box to show actuator setting applicable for velocity and acceleration/deceleration settings
[3] Set the model code, lead stroke and the posture of the applicable actuator in “Actuator setting for Vel
and Acc setting” window.
Click Setting button.
[4] Direction
[6] Cancel Button
[1] Model
[2] Lead [mm] [3] Stroke [mm] [5] Setting Button
Fig. 12.13 Actuator setting for Vel and Acc setting Window
165
12. Smart Tuning Function (Version V8.03.00.00 or Later)
Fig. 12.11 Smart tuning button
[4] Click Load Setting button at the setting display of the actuator applicable for velocity and
acceleration/deceleration settings.
Load Setting Button
Fig. 12.14 Box to show carrier load setting for velocity and acceleration/deceleration settings
[5] Set the carrier load in “Carrier load setting for Smart tuning function” window.
Click OK button.
[1] Load Setting
[2] OK Button
[3] Cancel Button
12. Smart Tuning Function (Version V8.03.00.00 or Later)
Fig. 12.15 Carrier load setting for Smart tuning function Window
[6] Select the carrier load number.
Load pattern No.
select
Fig. 12.16 Box to show Carrier load setting for Smart tuning function
166
[7] Set the position and velocity in the blank position numbers.
(Note) In the position numbers with data already set, this function cannot be used.
Position and
velocity setting cell
Acceleration and
deceleration
setting cell
Carrier load setting cell
Position data input area
Fig. 12.17 Edit position data Window
(Note) If the set velocity exceeds the maximum velocity for the carrier load, overwrite the set velocity
with the maximum speed for the carrier load.
(Note) If there is no value set in the velocity cell, the speed shown below will be set in the velocity cell.
This value will also be used as the maximum acceleration speed in Step [9]. If a value is set in the
acceleration and deceleration cells, they will be overwritten in Step [9].
[8] “Smart tuning method select” window will appear. Select “Auto-configure Acc depend Carrier load and
Vel.” and click OK Button.
Fig. 12.18 Smart tuning method select Window
(Auto-configure Acc depend Carrier load and Vel being selected)
[9] The maximum acceleration and deceleration speed for the carrier load and velocity are set to the
acceleration and deceleration.
167
12. Smart Tuning Function (Version V8.03.00.00 or Later)
Adoptable Speed for Each Condition
Velocity set in the speed cell
Conditions
Speed used for max.
acceleration/deceleration speed setting
Default speed ≤ Max. speed
Default speed
for carrier load
Default speed > Max. speed
Max. speed for carrier load
for carrier load
(2) The way to operate the velocity and acceleration/deceleration speed setting function to figure out the
shortest operation time from the indicated carrier load and moving distance
[1] Click Smart tuning button to activate the smart tuning.
The display turns on and the function turns available.
12. Smart Tuning Function (Version V8.03.00.00 or Later)
[1] Smart tuning button
Fig. 12.19 Smart tuning button
[2] Click Setting Actuator button at the setting display of the actuator applicable for velocity and
acceleration/deceleration settings.
Setting Actuator Button
Fig. 12.20 Box to show actuator setting applicable for velocity and acceleration/deceleration settings
[3] Set the model code, lead stroke and the posture of the applicable actuator in “Actuator setting for Vel
and Acc setting” window.
Click Setting button.
[4] Direction
[6] Cancel Button
[1] Model
[2] Lead [mm] [3] Stroke [mm] [5] Setting Button
Fig. 12.21 Actuator setting for Vel and Acc setting Window
168
[4] Click Load Setting button at the setting display of the actuator applicable for velocity and
acceleration/deceleration settings.
Load Setting Button
Fig. 12.22 Box to show carrier load setting for velocity and acceleration/deceleration settings
[5] Set the carrier load in “Load setting for Vel and Acc setting” window.
Click OK button.
[1] Load Setting
[2] OK Button
[3] Cancel Button
Fig. 12.23 Carrier load setting for Smart tuning function Window
Position and
velocity setting cell
Acceleration and
deceleration
setting cell
Carrier load setting cell
Position data input area
Fig. 12.24 Edit position data Window
(Note) The value set to the cells that is to be set automatically with this function, such as the velocity cell,
can also be overwritten.
169
12. Smart Tuning Function (Version V8.03.00.00 or Later)
[6] Set the position and velocity in the blank position numbers.
(Note) In the position numbers with data already set, this function cannot be used.
[7] “Smart tuning method select” window will appear. Select “Auto-configure Auto-configure Acc and vel
depend Carrier load and distance.” and click OK Button.
Fig. 12.25 Smart tuning method select Window
(Auto-configure Acc and Vel depend Carrier load and distance being selected)
[8] “Moving Distance Setting” window appears. Select the way to indicate the moving distance.
12. Smart Tuning Function (Version V8.03.00.00 or Later)
Fig. 12.26 Distance setting Window
(Select 2 position)
Fig. 12.27 Distance setting Window
(Assign distance)
For the following sections, the operation differs for the cases when indicating 2 points of positions and when
indicating the moving distance.
● When indicating 2 points of positions
[9] Set the start position number setting box and click on OK button.
Fig. 12.28 Distance setting Window
(Select 2 position)
(Note) The position number set in Step [6] will be shown in End Position box.
It is able to change End Position. However, if End Position is changed, the velocity, acceleration
and deceleration are figured out based on the distance between the set start position and end
position, and set to the position that the position was set in Step [6].
170
[10] The velocity and acceleration/deceleration speed to provide the shortest operation time are set to the
position that the position was set in Step [6] under the condition that the distance from the point of the
start position number to the point at the end position number is considered as the movement distance.
(Note) The following message may appear depending on the combination of the velocity and
acceleration/deceleration speed. It is displayed when the acceleration mode is S-shape Mode
and the acceleration time is 2.0 [sec] or longer in the operation plan. The message will no longer
appear if the setting is changed to that with acceleration time less than 2.0 [sec] for the velocity
and acceleration/deceleration.
Fig. 12.29 Compulsory Trapezoid Operation Message
● When indicating moving distance
[9] Set the moving distance setting box and click on OK button.
[10] The velocity and acceleration/deceleration speed to provide the shortest operation time which are
figured out from the set movement distance are set to the position that the position was set in Step [6].
(Note) The following message may appear depending on the combination of the velocity and
acceleration/deceleration speed. The message will no longer appear if the setting is changed to
that with acceleration time less than 2.0 [sec] for the velocity and acceleration/deceleration.
Fig. 12.31 Compulsory Trapezoid Operation Message
171
12. Smart Tuning Function (Version V8.03.00.00 or Later)
Fig. 12.30 Distance setting Window
(Assign distance)
(3) The way to operate the overshoot judgment function at S motion operation
[1] Click Smart tuning button to activate the smart tuning.
The display turns on and the function turns available.
12. Smart Tuning Function (Version V8.03.00.00 or Later)
[1] Smart tuning button
Fig. 12.32 Smart tuning button
[2] Click Setting Actuator button at the setting display of the actuator applicable for velocity and
acceleration/deceleration settings.
Setting Actuator Button
Fig. 12.33 Box to show actuator setting applicable for velocity and acceleration/deceleration settings
[3] Set the model code, lead stroke and the posture of the applicable actuator in “Actuator setting for Vel
and Acc setting” window.
Click Setting button.
[4] Direction
[6] Cancel Button
[1] Model
[2] Lead [mm] [3] Stroke [mm] [5] Setting Button
Fig. 12.34 Actuator setting for Vel and Acc setting Window
172
[4] Click Load Setting button at the setting display of the actuator applicable for velocity and
acceleration/deceleration settings.
Load Setting Button
Fig. 12.35 Box to show carrier load setting for velocity and acceleration/deceleration settings
[5] Set the carrier load in “Carrier load setting for Smart tuning function” window.
Click OK button.
[1] Load Setting
[2] OK Button
[3] Cancel Button
Fig. 12.36 Carrier load setting for Smart tuning function Window
Fig. 12.37 Popup Menu
(Check risk overshoot, when drive S motion.)
173
12. Smart Tuning Function (Version V8.03.00.00 or Later)
[6] Right-click on the position data cell that the overshoot judgment is desired, and select “Check risk
overshoot, when drive S motion.”.
[7] “Distance setting” window appears. Select the way to indicate the moving distance.
Fig. 12.38 Distance setting Window
(Select 2 position)
Fig. 12.39 Distance setting Window
(Assign distance)
For the following sections, the operation differs for the cases when indicating 2 points of positions and when
indicating the moving distance.
12. Smart Tuning Function (Version V8.03.00.00 or Later)
● When indicating 2 points of positions
[8] Set the start position number setting box and click on OK button.
Fig. 12.40 Distance setting Window
(Select 2 position)
[9] With the position set in the start position number and position set in the end position number as the
moving distance, overshoot judgment is conducted regarding the position set in the end position.
When the risk of overshooting is high, the message shows “Risk High”, while when it is low, shows “Risk
Low”.
Fig. 12.41 Overshoot Judgment Message
(Risk High)
Fig. 12.42 Overshoot Judgment Message
(Risk Low)
174
● When indicating moving distance
[8] Set the moving distance setting box and click on OK button.
Fig. 12.43 Distance setting Window
(Assign distance)
[9] In the position where the cursor showed the popup menu (background color: blue), the overshoot
judgment is conducted at the set moving distance.
When the risk of overshooting is high, the message shows “Risk High”, while when it is low, shows
“Risk Low”.
Fig. 12.44 Overshoot Judgment Message
(Risk High)
Fig. 12.45 Overshoot Judgment Message
(Risk Low)
12. Smart Tuning Function (Version V8.03.00.00 or Later)
175
12.4 Operation on Test Run and Cycle Time Calculation
This section explains how to operate the test run and cycle time calculation.
To open the operation window for test run and cycle time calculation, select [Main Menu]  [Parameter] 
[Control Parameter Setting]  [Offboard Tuning].
Select actuator window (Fig. 12.46) will be displayed.
(Note) “Takt Time” is changed to “Cycle Time” from the software version V9.05.00.00.
12.4.1 Outline of Test Run Operation
In the test run operation, the setting work is to be done in the order of following windows.
By clicking on Next button on the bottom of the screen, the window forwards to the next one.
[1] Select Actuator
↓
[2] Carrier Load Select
↓
[3] Test Run
↓
[4] Adjustment Record Save
12. Smart Tuning Function (Version V8.03.00.00 or Later)
In the following pages, shows how to operate in each window.
176
12.4.2 Explanation of Each Window for Test Run Operation
(1) Select actuator Window
Select the model in this window. Select the model in [2] Select actuator model, and click Next.
[1] Displayed Window/Model Information Display Area
[4] Common Buttons Area
[3] Adjustment record data Display Area
Fig. 12.46 Select actuator Window
[1] Displayed Window/Model Information Display Area
Displayed Window Information
Model Information
Fig. 12.47 Displayed Window/Model Information Display Area
Displayed Window Information
The name of the window currently displayed is shown.
Model Information
The information of actuator selected in “Select actuator” window is shown.
177
12. Smart Tuning Function (Version V8.03.00.00 or Later)
[5] Database File Version Display Area
[2] Select actuator model
[2] Select actuator model
Source Data Select for Model Select
Tuning Record Data File Select
Model Select Settings
Tuning Record Data Select
Fig. 12.48 Select actuator model
12. Smart Tuning Function (Version V8.03.00.00 or Later)
Source Data Select for Model Select
Select whether creating a “new adjustment model” or “choosing from the adjustment record”.
If creating a “new adjustment model” is selected, select a model to have a test run and cycle time
calculation from the models registered in the actuator attribute data file.
If “choosing from the adjustment record”, select a model to have a test run and cycle time from the
models registered in the adjustment record data stored in the past.
(Note) “Adjustment record” is not available to select unless there is adjustment record data.
Model Select Settings
Set the data type, model code, lead stroke and posture of actuator installation of the model that will have
a test run and cycle time calculation.
(Note) The model code, lead or stroke that is not registered in the actuator attribute data file cannot be
selected.
Adjustment Record Data File Select
Fig. 12.49 Adjustment Record Data File Select
By clicking on
button, the adjustment record data file to be used can be changed. The name of the
adjustment record data file being used is shown on the right of the button with an under line.
(Note) Selecting the adjustment record data file is only available when Source Data Select for Model
Select is set to “Select from Adjustment Record”.
(Note) The file initially selected when the Test run and Cycle Time Calculation Operation Window is
open is “\[RC PC Software Save Folder]\DB_OFFBRD\DatRcrdAdjsted_24V_PM_BU.orcd”.
(Note) If there is no Adjustment Record Data File, or failed to open the file, the display of the adjustment
record data file select changes to the following display.
Fig. 12.50 Adjustment Record Data File Select (File not selected)
178
Adjustment Record Data Select
This is used when switch over the adjustment record data. Number of selectable adjustment record data
is shown on the right side.
It is able to narrow down the search of the adjustment record data by model select setting. The item with
blank in the model select setting gets excluded from the search conditions.
Example) If set as: Model Code = RCP4-RA5C, Lead = 3mm
 The search result is narrowed down from the adjustment record data to those for
RCP4-RA5C with 3mm lead.
Example) If set as: Model Code = RCP4-RA5C, Lead = Blank
 The search result is narrowed down from the adjustment record data to those for
RCP4-RA5C no matter the lead length.
Click on << or >> button and the data on the very end can be selected from the selectable adjustment
record data.
Click < or > button and the cursor moves from 1 record to the next in the selected adjustment record
data.
Putting a number to Edit lying between < and > buttons will let select the indicated adjustment record
data directly.
12. Smart Tuning Function (Version V8.03.00.00 or Later)
179
[3] Adjustment Record Data Display Area
In here, shows the details of the adjustment record data selected in “Select from Adjustment Record” in
the actuator select actuator.
Fig. 12.51 Adjustment record data Display Area (Select actuator Window)
Data No.
It shows the data number of the displayed adjustment record.
Model, Lead (mm), Stroke (mm)
It shows the information of actuator selected in “Select actuator” window.
12. Smart Tuning Function (Version V8.03.00.00 or Later)
Origin gain
In here, shows the origin gain if the origin gain is the stored adjustment record data.
For the adjustment record data without the stored origin gain, it is shown with blank.
Fig. 12.52 Origin gain (Select actuator Window) (Not stored)
180
Adjustment gain
Since it is not applicable for PCON-CA, PCON-CB, ERC3 and MCON (Pulse motor) gain tuning,
adjustment gain display is shown with blank.
Fig. 12.53 Adjustment gain (Not stored)
Sys identification
Since PCON-CA, PCON-CB, ERC3 and MCON (Pulse motor) are not applicable for system
identification, a blank is displayed here.
Fig. 12.54 Sys identification (Not stored)
Load
In “Carrier load select” window, the carrier load which was indicated is displayed.
Comment
The comment, if any left in “Adjustment record data save” when the adjustment record was saved, is
displayed.
181
12. Smart Tuning Function (Version V8.03.00.00 or Later)
Tuning
Since PCON-CA, PCON-CB, ERC3 and MCON (Pulse motor) are not applicable for gain tuning, a blank
is displayed here.
[4] Common Buttons Area
Fig. 12.55 Common Buttons Area (Condition of all buttons displayed)
Next Button
Click this button and the next window is displayed.
In “Adjustment record data save” window, this button changes to the following.
Fig. 12.56 Display in Adjustment record data save Window
(Note) When a setting process in the currently displayed window to move onto the next window is
incomplete, a message will be displayed and cannot go to the next window.
Back Button
Click this button and the screen goes back to the window shown before the currently displayed
window.
(Note) This button is not shown in “Select actuator” window.
12. Smart Tuning Function (Version V8.03.00.00 or Later)
Cycle Time Calculation Button
Click this button and the cycle time calculation window is displayed.
(Note) This button is available to click only when showing “Test run” window or “Adjustment record
data save” window.
[5] Database File Version Display Area
In here, shows the file version of the database file necessary for the test run and cycle time calculation.
182
(2) Carrier Load Select Window
Set the carrier load in this window. After setting, click Next.
[1] Carrier Load Indication
Method Select
[2] Carrier Load
Indication
[3] System Identification
Setting
[4] System Identification
Result
[1] Carrier Load Indication Method Select
Assign carrier load
Indicate the carrier load with the value directly input.
This is the only way to select for PCON-CA, PCON-CB, ERC3 and MCON (Pulse motor).
It calculates by the system identification.
This cannot be used for PCON-CA, PCON-CB, ERC3 and MCON (Pulse motor).
[2] Carrier Load Indication
Input a value to set the carrier load.
[3] System Identification Setting
This cannot be used for PCON-CA, PCON-CB, ERC3 and MCON (Pulse motor).
[4] System Identification Result
This cannot be used for PCON-CA, PCON-CB, 1ERC3 and MCON (Pulse motor).
183
12. Smart Tuning Function (Version V8.03.00.00 or Later)
Fig. 12.57 Carrier load Select Window
(3) Test run
Indicate the operation settings in this window, and the actuator can have a test run.
(Note) The test run function is available only in the online work. When it is offline the screen shows as
shown in the next page and the test run function cannot be used.
12. Smart Tuning Function (Version V8.03.00.00 or Later)
[2] Test run setting
[1] Gain Display Area
[3] Test run result Display Area
Fig. 12.58 Test run Window (in online work)
184
Fig. 12.59 Test run Window (in online work)
Fig. 12.60 Gain Display Area
[2] Test run setting
Fig. 12.61 Test run setting
185
12. Smart Tuning Function (Version V8.03.00.00 or Later)
[1] Gain Display Area
The servo gain used in the test run is shown.
Start pos (mm)
Set the test run start position of the actuator.
End pos (mm)
Set the test run end position of the actuator.
Vel (mm/s)
Set the test run velocity of the actuator.
Acc (G)
Set the test run acceleration of the actuator.
Dcl (G)
Set the test run deceleration of the actuator.
Use gain set No.
Set the gain set number used in the test run.
* No. 0 is only available for PCON-CA, PCON-CB, ERC3 and MCON (Pulse motor).
12. Smart Tuning Function (Version V8.03.00.00 or Later)
Complete pos
Set the actuator stop position after operation complete from the start position to the end position.
The following two items can be selected for the stop position.
• Soft limit • Start pos
Drv Mode
Set the operation mode during test run.
The operation mode can be selected from the following two items.
• Trapezoid
• S-shape
* The following message may appear after clicking Start button depending on the parameter setting.
Select Yes and the following user parameters are changed as described, and the test run starts
executed.
<Parameters to be changed>
Set value
Trapezoid
S-shape
*1
No.56 “Sigmoid motion ratio setting [%]”
Original Setting
100
No.71 “Position feed-forward gain”
Original Setting*1
90
*1 If a change has made to the S motion operation parameter in “Cycle time
calculation” window, the parameter for the trapezoid operation is changed
from the original values to that of S motion operation.
Name
Select No and the test run is cancelled with no change to the parameters.
Fig. 12.62 Confirmation message for Change to S motion Operation Parameter
186
Operation Start Button
Click this button to start the test run.
(Note) Without clicking on Stop button, the test run automatically finishes at the end.
(Note) In some cases of start position and end position settings, the following message may appear.
In the case this message is displayed, change the start position and end position so the
moving distance can be long enough.
Fig. 12.63 Operation Unable Message due to Moving Distance too short
(Note) The following message may appear depending on the combination of velocity and
acceleration/deceleration settings when “S Motion” is selected for the operation mode. The
message will no longer appear if the setting is changed to that with acceleration time less than
2.0 [sec] for the velocity and acceleration/deceleration.
(Note) The following message may appear depending on the operation settings when “S Motion” is
selected for the operation mode. Select Yes and the test run operation can be executed. To
make the warning not to appear, change the operation setting so the acceleration time
becomes longer.
Fig. 12.65 Overshoot Warning Message
Stop Button
Click this button and the test run is cancelled.
187
12. Smart Tuning Function (Version V8.03.00.00 or Later)
Fig. 12.64 Compulsory Trapezoid Operation Message
[3] Test run Result Display
Test run result Graph
Tool Button
Fig. 12.66 Test run result Display Area
12. Smart Tuning Function (Version V8.03.00.00 or Later)
Tool button
Fig. 12.67 Tool button (Test run Window)
Open the comparison file
Click this button, and comparison file to be shown with the test run result.
Comparison file is a file in the servo monitor format.
Save with a new name
Click this button to save the wave formed data of the test run result with the data
format described below.
• bsmrc format (file format available for comparison file)
• csv format
(Note) Multiple formats can be selected.
188
Zoom in/out of Vertical Axis
Click these buttons to zoom in and out the vertical axis of the test run result.
Zoom in/out of Horizontal Axis
Click these buttons to zoom in and out the horizontal axis of the test run result.
Displayed Data Switchover
The data (velocity/current) shown on the test run result graph can be switched over
with this radio button.
* Only the velocity is available to show for PCON-CA, PCON-CB, ERC3 and MCON
(Pulse motor).
12. Smart Tuning Function (Version V8.03.00.00 or Later)
189
(4) Adjustment record data save window
Save the adjustment record in this window.
[1] Adjustment Record Data Display
12. Smart Tuning Function (Version V8.03.00.00 or Later)
[2] Save new record
/Over write present record
Fig. 12.68 Adjustment record data save Window
[1] Adjustment Record Data Display
Data saved as the adjustment record can be displayed. For the two items shown below, the display and
function change from the adjustment record data display in “Select actuator” window.
Gain Set No. Select
Fig. 12.69 Display of Origin gain (Adjustment record data save Window)
Comment Input Box
Fig. 12.70 Comment Box (Adjustment record data save Window)
190
Gain Set No. Select
Select the gain set number that is to be saved as the origin gain. The gain which is set to the controller at
the startup of the Test run and Cycle time Calculation Operation Window can be saved.
Since PCON-CA, PCON-CB, ERC3 and MCON (Pulse motor) are not applicable for the gain setting, the
only number being able to choose for Gain Set Number is ‘0’.
When “Select from Adjustment Record” is selected in “Select actuator” window, and if the adjustment
record data before the gain is saved, the origin gain that was saved in the origin gain record can be
saved by selecting “*” in the gain set number window shown below. The gain set to the controller cannot
be saved.
Fig. 12.71 Gain Set Number Select
(When origin gain is saved in adjustment record)
(Note) “*” can be displayed only when the origin gain is saved in the adjustment record data.
(Note) The display of the gain set No. select changes to the one as shown below when it is offline.
Fig. 12.73 Display of Origin gain (Adjustment
record data save Window)
(with origin gain)
Comment Input Box
A comment to save in the adjustment record can be input. The comment can be made with 32 half-sized
characters at the maximum.
[2] Save new record/Over write present record Button
Save new record Button
Click this button and the adjustment record that is displayed in the adjustment record data display
can be saved as another file.
Over write present record Button
Click this button and the adjustment record at the data number in the adjustment record data display
is overwritten.
(Note) Overwriting is available only after the adjustment record currently displayed is already saved
at least once, or when “Adjustment record” is chosen in “Select actuator” window.
191
12. Smart Tuning Function (Version V8.03.00.00 or Later)
Fig. 12.72 Display of Origin gain (Adjustment
record data save Window)
(with no origin gain)
12.4.3 Explanation of Cycle Time Calculation Window
Cycle time calculation can be performed in this window.
* Click the Cycle Time Calculation button in “Test Run” or “Adjustment Record Save” window.
Cycle Time Calculation
Fig. 12.74 Common Buttons Area in Smart tuning Window
12. Smart Tuning Function (Version V8.03.00.00 or Later)
[1] Display Switchover Tab
Fig. 12.75 Cycle time calculation Window (Test run plan Setting Window)
[1] Display Switchover Tab
With these tabs, the displays of “Test run plan setting” window and “Test run result Display” window can
be switched over.
192
(1) Test run plan
[1] Friction Display Area
[2] Operation Pattern Setting Grid
[3] Operation
Pattern Setting
Tool Buttons
[4] Parameter
setting
The settings of operation pattern to be held for cycle time calculation can be conducted in this window.
The maximum operation patterns available to set are 10 patterns.
[1] Friction Display
Fig. 12.77 Friction Display Area
Viscs frct
In here, shows the coefficient of viscous friction. The setting unit is [Nms].
(Note) Since PCON-CA, PCON-CB, ERC3 and MCON (Pulse motor) are not complied with system
identification, “0.000000000” is displayed in the box.
193
12. Smart Tuning Function (Version V8.03.00.00 or Later)
Fig. 12.76 Test run plan Setting Window
Dynmic frct
In here, shows the kinetic friction torque. The setting unit is [Nm].
(Note) Since PCON-CA, PCON-CB, ERC3 and MCON (Pulse motor) are not complied with system
identification, “0.000000” is displayed in the box.
Tuning
For a controller applicable for gain tuning, the way to tune is displayed.
* Since PCON-CA, PCON-CB, ERC3 and MCON (Pulse motor) are not applicable for gain tuning, a
blank is displayed here.
12. Smart Tuning Function (Version V8.03.00.00 or Later)
[2] Operation Pattern Setting Grid
Set the operation patterns to have cycle time calculation. Once the cycle time calculation is complete,
the operation pattern can be copied and pasted to Position Data Edit window.
Fig. 12.78 Operation Pattern Setting Grid
Load (kg)
Set the carrier load.
(Note) The settings of carrier load are reflected to the limitations of velocity and
acceleration/deceleration.
Pos (mm)
Set the position.
The top line (No.S) is the start position setting cell.
Vel (mm/s)
Set the velocity.
194
Acc (G)
Set the acceleration.
Dcl (G)
Set the deceleration.
INP (mm)
Set the positioning width.
SMotion
Set the operation type from trapezoid and S motion operations, which is to be used for the cycle time
calculation. The numbers corresponding to the trapezoid and S motion operations are as shown below.
• Trapezoid : 0
• S Motion : 1
INC
Set the movement type from absolute move and incremental move, which is to be used for the cycle time
calculation. The numbers corresponding to the absolute and incremental moves are as shown below.
• Absolute
:0
• Incremental : 1
Gain Set
Set the gain set number used for the cycle time calculation.
* For PCON-CA, PCON-CB, ERC3 and MCON (Pulse motor), only Gain Set No. 0 is available.
Rest time (s)
Set the rest time.
12. Smart Tuning Function (Version V8.03.00.00 or Later)
195
[3] Operation Pattern Setting Tool Buttons
Fig. 12.79 Operation Pattern Setting Tool Buttons
Fastest ptn Button
Click this button to set the operation pattern that provides the shortest operation time considering the
moving distance.
(Note) Fastest Operation Setting cannot be set unless the settings for the carrier load and moving
distance are complete.
Copy Button
Click this button to copy the content of selected cell.
Paste Button
Click this button to paste the copied content to the selected cell.
Ins 1 line Button
Click this button to insert a blank line to the selected cell.
12. Smart Tuning Function (Version V8.03.00.00 or Later)
Del 1 line Button
Click this button to delete the content of the selected line and let the lines below the deleted line go
up by one line.
Del all line Button
Click this button to delete all the settings in the operation pattern setting grid.
Execute Button
Click this button to execute the cycle time calculation with the operation pattern set to the operation
pattern setting grid.
196
[4] Parameter Setting
Fig. 12.80 Parameter Setting
Change parameter for S Motion
Click this button to change the following parameters for the gain set indicated in the operation pattern
that the cycle time calculation is already complete with S motion operation.
<Parameters to be changed>
Name
No.56 “Sigmoid motion ratio setting [%]”
No.71 “Position feed-forward gain”
Set value
100
90
Restore parameter
This returns to the parameter settings displayed in the test run window for the gain set that the
parameters were Change parameter for S Motion button.
12. Smart Tuning Function (Version V8.03.00.00 or Later)
197
(2) Test run result
12. Smart Tuning Function (Version V8.03.00.00 or Later)
[1] Test run result Time Display Area
[2] Test run result Graph Display Area
Fig. 12.81 Test run result Display Window
[1] Test run result Time Display Area
Pattern selection
Fig. 12.82 Test run result Time Display Area
198
Operation pattern selection
Select the pattern to be displayed in the cycle time calculation result graph with this combo box.
The operation pattern numbers that the cycle time calculation was held with are available to choose.
INP time (s)
In here, shows the positioning time of the operation pattern selected in the pattern select in “Test run
result Time Display Area”.
Cycle time (s)
In here, shows the cycle time of the operation pattern selected in the pattern select in “Test run result
Time Display Area”.
Cycle time is the sum of positioning time and pause time.
Accum. cycle time (s)
In here, shows the cumulative total cycle times from Pattern 1 to the pattern selected in the pattern
select in “Test run result Time Display Area”.
Total cycle time (s)
In here, shows the total cycle time of all the patterns included in the cycle time calculation.
[2] Test run Result Graph Display Area
Tool button
Test run result Graph
199
12. Smart Tuning Function (Version V8.03.00.00 or Later)
Fig. 12.83 Test run result Graph Display
Tool Button
Fig. 12.84 Tool Button (Cycle Time Calculation Window)
Zoom in/out of Vertical Axis
Click this button to zoom in/out the vertical axis of the operation graph.
Zoom in/out of Horizontal Axis
Click this button to zoom in/out the horizontal axis of the operation graph.
Displayed Data Switchover
The data (velocity/position) shown on the cycle time calculation result graph can be
switched over with this radio button.
12. Smart Tuning Function (Version V8.03.00.00 or Later)
Test run Result Graph
Fig. 12.85 Test run result Graph (Velocity response)
The data selected with the check box on the displayed data switchover radio button can be
shown.
200
13.
Off Board Tuning Function
(Note)
The following features cannot be performed on SCON-CAL/CGAL as the servo monitoring
cannot be performed.
• Method by system identification to actually operate an actuator
• Display of result after trial run
If RC PC software (Version V8. 05. 00. 00 or later, V9.02.00.00 or later for MSCON, V9.07.00.00 or later for
SCON-CAL/CGAL, Version V10. 00. 00. 00 or later for SCON-CB) is installed, the key file (OffBrdTune.dll file),
and an actuator attribute data file (such as AtrDatActuator_200V_AC.oact) that are required for the off board
tuning function are also installed, the off board tuning function can be used.
They are installed in the folder that the executable file for ‘RcPc PC software’ is stored.
Example of storage folder : C:\Program Files\IAI\RoboCylinder
DB_OFFBRD folder
PC software for RC
IAI America Inc.
RcPc
PC software for RC
Executable file
Key file
(OffBrdTune.dll file)
Fig. 13.1 Folder with RC PC Software Executable File Stored
(Note) The directory for the database files except for the adjustment record data is to be fixed. Changing the
directory will make the system judge that the files do not exist.
(Note) The file name of the adjustment record data is initially selected when the off board tuning window opens.
Only this file is allowed to change the file to be used. (For the details, refer to Adjustment Record Data
File Select.)
201
13. Off Board Tuning Function
In DB_OFFBRD folder, files listed below etc. are to be stored;
• AtrDatActuator_200V_AC.oact
• DatRcrdAdjsted_200V_AC.orcd
• TblDatAdjstManuEasily.omnu
• DatLimtrAdjst.olmt
13.1 Restrictions
13.1.1 Actuators Applicable for Off Board Tuning Function
The Off Board Tuning Function is only available for the actuators registered in the actuator attribute data file
(AtrDatActuator_200V_AC.oact etc.).
The gain calculation is conducted based on the actuator attribute data file. The gain calculation for the actuator
not registered in the actuator attribute data file cannot be conducted.
13.1.2 Restrictions in Operation
1) The Off Board Tuning Function is not available when any of the following windows are activated:
• “Parameter edit” Window
• “Servo monitoring” Window
• “Frequency analysis for anti-vibration control”
2) The following windows cannot be activated during the use of Off Board Tuning Function:
• “Parameter edit” Window
• “Servo monitoring” Window
• “Frequency analysis for anti-vibration control”
3) Parameter setting to the controller using Off Board Tuning Function cannot be performed if it is offline.
13.1.3 Caution Regarding Gain Set No. 0
13. Off Board Tuning Function
The home-return operation is conducted using the gains in Gain Set No. 0. Follow the cautions stated below
and have the settings of Gain Set No. 0 set up.
(1) When the carrier load is lighter than the rated carrier load;
1) Set either one of the following gains to Gain Set No. 0.
• The gain set up in the condition when the product was shipped out
• Adjustment gain suited to the rated carrier load
2) Adjustment gain should be set to Gain Set No. 1, 2 or 3, not to Gain Set No. 0.
If the adjustment gain is set to Gain Set No. 0, it may cause a problem such as vibration in the home-return
operation.
(2) When the carrier load is heavier than the rated carrier load;
Set the adjustment gain to Gain Set No. 0.
With the gain set before the product is shipped out, it may not be able to perform the home-return operation
since the load is heavier than the rated carrier load.
202
13.2 Guideline of Off Board Tuning Function
Off Board Tuning Function is a function aiming for the optimum gain calculation considering the carrier load.
The following 6 types of gains are calculated:
[1] Servo-Motor Gain Number
[2] Position Feed Forward Gain
[3] Speed Loop Proportional Gain
[4] Speed Loop Integral Gain
[5] Torque Filter Time Constant
[6] Current Control Band Number
There are 4 gain sets to store the 6 types of gain stated above to the parameters in the controller. The
calculated gain can be written to the indicated gain set.
13.3 How to Start up
Select
[Parameter (P)]  [Control Parameter Setting (C)]  [Off Board Tuning (T)]
from the main menu.
13. Off Board Tuning Function
203
13.4 Operation to Select Target Axis Number for Off Board Tuning
13.4.1 Explanation of Each Item Shown in Window
Select the axis number to conduct the off board tuning in this window.
If online work is desired for off board tuning, select Online work, select the axis number, and click on the OK
button.
If offline is desired for off board tuning, select Offline work, select the motor type, and click on the OK button.
Offline work (only to calculate the gain, not to send the parameters to the controller) is also available.
[1] Online work/Offline
work switchover
[2] Select Axis No.
[3] Select Motor type
[4] OK/CANCEL button
Fig. 13.2 Select target axis no. for off board tuning.
13. Off Board Tuning Function
[1] Online work/Offline work switchover
Online work
Select this radio button and activate the “Select actuator” window to enable the online tuning.
(Note) System identification, test run and data sending of the calculated gain to the controller is available
online.
(Note) Online work is only available when connected to a controller that supports the off board tuning
function.
Offline work
Select this radio button and activate the “Select actuator” window to enable the offline tuning.
(Note) System identification, test run and data sending of the calculated gain to the controller are not
available if it is offline.
(Note) Offline work is available even when not connected to a controller.
Gain calculation and cycle time calculation can be performed both online/offline.
[2] Select Axis No.
Select the axis number that tuning is to be conducted.
(Note) This item can be set only when Online work is selected.
(Note) Only axis numbers for actuators supporting the off board tuning function are selectable.
204
[3] Select Motor type
Select the motor type of the actuator for the tuning in the offline work.
[4] OK/CANCEL button
OK button
Click on the OK button to close “Select target axis no. for off board tuning” window and activate “Select
actuator” window.
There may be a case the following message box opens after clicking OK. Follow the message and
select the appropriate answer.
Fig. 13.3 Confirmation for MANU Operation Mode Change (at the start of Off board tuning window)
(Note) The off board tuning window would not start unless the mode is changed from MANU Mode to
Teach Mode.
(Note) If clicking Yes to change the setting of MANU Operation Mode, the following message will show
up at the end Off board tuning window. Close the message box and the settings of MANU
Operation Mode and Safety Speed will be changed back as they were before changing.
CANCEL button
Click on the Cancel button and “Off board tuning target axis no. select” window will close, and the
activation of “Select actuator” window will be cancelled.
205
13. Off Board Tuning Function
Fig. 13.4 Confirmation for MANU Mode and Safety Speed Changes (at the end of Off board tuning window)
13.5 Operation on Off Board Tuning
13.5.1 Outline of Operation
The off board tuning is to be conducted in the process shown below:
[1] Set the model in Select actuator window.
Click Next and the step forwards to Carrier load select window.
↓
[2] Set the load in Carrier load Select window.
There are 2 ways to set the load as shown below.
• To indicate the carrier load
• To identify the system that actually moves the actuator
(This operation cannot be conducted on SCON-CAL/CGAL.)
Click Next and the step forwards to Select adjustment method window.
↓
[3] Select the method to adjust the gain in Select adjustment method window.
There are 3 types for the adjustment.
• Set the Base Control Band
• Set the Simple Tuning
• Set the Manual
Except for the Manual Adjustment setting, click Next and the gain adjustment starts.
Once the gain adjustment is complete, a message box asking whether setting the calculated gain to the
parameter opens.
Click OK and the calculated gain is set to the parameter, and the step forwards to the test run.
13. Off Board Tuning Function
↓
[4] For the Manual Adjustment setting, gain is to be adjusted manually in the Manual window.
Click Next and the gain adjustment starts.
Once the gain adjustment is complete, a message box asking whether setting the calculated gain to the
parameter opens.
Click OK and the calculated gain is set to the parameter, and the step forwards to the test run.
↓
[5] Have a test run of the adjusted gain in the test run window to check the operation.
(SCON-CAL/CGAL can perform a trial run, but the result cannot be displayed.)
Click Next and Adjustment record save window opens.
↓
[6] The result of the gain adjustment can be stored in Adjustment record save window.
The following pages, provide the explanations for the operations in each window.
206
13.5.2 Explanations for each Item in Select actuator Window
Select the model of the actuator for tuning in this window.
[1] Displayed Window/Model Information Display Area
[4] Common Buttons Area
[3] Adjustment record data Display Area
Fig. 13.5 Select actuator Window
[1] Displayed Window/Model Information Display
Displayed Window Information
Model Information
Fig. 13.6 Displayed Window/Model Information Display
Displayed Window Information
The name of the window currently displayed is shown.
Model Information
The information of actuator selected in “Select actuator” window is shown.
207
13. Off Board Tuning Function
[5] Database File Version Display
[2] Select actuator model
[2] Select actuator model
Select actuator Settings
Source Data Select for Select actuator
Adjustment Record Data File Select
Adjustment Record Data Select
Fig. 13.7 Select actuator model
Source Data Select for Select actuator
Select the source data for the model selection.
If choosing “New adjustment model”, select the model to tune from the models registered in the actuator
attribute data file.
If choosing “Adjustment record”, select the model to tune from the models registered in the adjustment
record data saved in the past.
(Note) “Adjustment record” is not available to select unless there is adjustment record data.
Select actuator Settings
Set the data type, model code, lead, stroke and actuator installed orientation for the model to be tuned.
(Note) The model code, lead or stroke not registered in the source data for select actuator cannot be set.
13. Off Board Tuning Function
Adjustment Record Data File Select
Fig. 13.8 Adjustment Record Data File Select
button, the adjustment record data file to be used can be changed.
By clicking on
The name of the adjustment record data file being used is shown on the right of the button and is
underlined.
(Note) Selecting the adjustment record data file is only available when Source Data Select for Select
actuator is set to “Adjustment record”.
(Note) The file initially selected when the Off board tuning window is open is “\[RC PC Software Save
Folder]\DB_OFFBRD\DatRcrdAdjsted_200V_AC.orcd”.
(Note) If there is no adjustment Record Data File, or failed to open the file, the display of the adjustment
record data file select changes to the following display.
Fig. 13.9 Adjustment Record Data File Select (File not selected)
208
Adjustment Record Data Select
This is used when switch over the adjustment record data. Number of selectable adjustment record data
is shown on the right side.
It is able to narrow down the search of the adjustment record data by select actuator setting. The item
with blank in the select actuator setting gets excluded from the search conditions.
Example) If set as: Model Code = ISB-SXM-60, Lead = 4mm
 The search result is narrowed down from the adjustment record data to those for
ISB-SXM-60 with 4mm lead.
Example) If set as: Model Code = ISB-SXM-60, Lead = Blank
 The search result is narrowed down from the adjustment record data to those for
ISB-SXM-60 no matter the lead length.
Click on << or >> button and the data on the very end can be selected from the selectable
adjustment record data.
Click < or > button and the cursor moves from 1 record to the next in the selected
adjustment record data.
Putting a number between < and > buttons will select the indicated adjustment record data
directly.
13. Off Board Tuning Function
209
[3] Adjustment record data Display
Fig. 13.10 Adjustment record data Display (Select actuator Window)
The details of the adjustment record data selected in Adjustment record data select is displayed.
Data No.
It shows the data number of the displayed adjustment record.
Model, Lead (mm) and Stroke (mm)
It shows the information of actuator selected in “Select actuator” window.
13. Off Board Tuning Function
Origin gain
In here, shows the origin gain if the origin gain is the stored adjustment record data.
For the adjustment record data without the stored origin gain, it will be as shown below.
Fig. 13.11 Origin gain (Select actuator Window)
(Origin gain not stored)
210
Adjustment gain
The gain after tuning is displayed. For the adjustment record the adjustment gain is sent to the controller,
the gain set number that the gain is set to is shown in Gain Set No., and “-“ is shown if not sent.
Sys identification
The result of the system identification is displayed for the adjustment record the system identification is
conducted.
Nothing is displayed as shown below for the adjustment record data saved with no system identification.
Fig. 13.12 Sys identification (Not stored)
Load
In “Carrier load Select” window, the carrier load which was indicated is displayed.
For the record, the carrier load calculated backwards from the synthetic inertia is displayed.
Tuning
The method of adjustment selected in “Select adjustment method” window is shown. The display is
switched as shown below depending on the selected method.
Fig. 13.14 Tuning display
(When the simple tuning)
Fig. 13.15 Tuning display
(When the Manual)
Comment
The comment is shown for the adjustment record data saved with a comment.
211
13. Off Board Tuning Function
Fig. 13.13 Tuning display
(When the Base ctrl band)
[4] Common Buttons Area
Fig. 13.16 Common Buttons Area (Condition of all buttons displayed)
Next button
Click this button and the next window is displayed.
In “Adjustment Record Save” window, this button changes to the following.
Fig. 13.17 Display in Adjustment Record Save Window
(Note) When a setting process in the currently displayed window to move onto the next window is
incomplete, a message will be displayed and cannot go to the next window.
Back button
Click this button and the screen goes back to the window shown before the currently displayed window.
(Note) This button is not shown in “Select actuator” window.
13. Off Board Tuning Function
Cycle Time Calculation button
Click this button and the cycle time calculation window is displayed.
(Note) This button is available to click only when showing “Test Run” window or “Adjustment Record
Save” window.
[5] Database File Version Display Area
In here, shows the file version of the database file necessary for the tuning.
212
13.5.3 Explanations for each Item in Carrier load Select Window
Set the carrier load in this window.
There are 2 ways for the selection of the carrier load, one is to indicate the carrier load and the other is to figure
out from the system identification, and selection can be made from these 2 ways.
(Note) The system identification is available to select only in the system identification model, such as
SCON-CA. In the online work of SCON-CAL/CGAL and offline work of SCON-CA, SCON-CB and
SCON-CAL/CGAL, the window switches to the one as shown in Fig. 13.19.
[1] Carrier Load Indication
Method Select
[2] Carrier Load
Indication
[3] System Identification
Setting
[4] System Identification
Result
213
13. Off Board Tuning Function
Fig. 13.18 Carrier load Select Window (in online work of SCON-CA)
13. Off Board Tuning Function
Fig. 13.19 Carrier load Select Window (In the online work of SCON-CAL/CGAL and in the offline work of
SCON-CA, SCON-CB and SCON-CAL/CGAL)
[1] Carrier Load Indication Method Select
Assign carrier load
Select this radio button and the indicated carrier load can be set.
It calculates by the system identification.
Select this radio button and the actuator actually operates in back and forth directions to estimate the
carrier load from the speed and current data obtained from the controller.
[2] Carrier Load Indication
Carrier load can be set with the numeric value input in Edit in Carrier load Select window 2.
214
[3] System Identification Setting
Operation setting for the system identification can be conducted.
Fig. 13.20 System Identification Setting
Start pos (mm)
The start position for the back and forth operation can be set.
(Note) In the operation for the system identification, the actuator moves back and forth between the start
position and end position.
Load (kg)
Set the carrier load.
(Note) This is the value used for the system identification calculation and the maximum speed operation
setting.
Set the size of the load roughly even if you do not know the accurate load size.
It is not necessary to change the value from the initial setting if you do not know the load size at
all.
Example) In the case you have the information that the load size is approximately 2 [kg], but you do not
know exactly;
Set “2.000” in Carrier load (kg).
215
13. Off Board Tuning Function
End pos (mm)
The end position for the back and forth operation can be set.
(Note) In the operation for the system identification, the actuator moves back and forth between the start
position and end position.
Acc (G)
Set the acceleration speed for back and forth operation.
Dcl (G)
Set the deceleration speed for back and forth operation.
Vel (mm/s)
Set the velocity for back and forth operation.
Complete pos
Set the data at what coordinates the actuator is to be stopped after the back and forth operation for
system identification is complete.
The selection is to be made from the following two;
• Soft limit –
: Stops on the soft limit – side (origin side)
• Start Position : Stops at the start position set in the identification setting
(Note) An operation suitable for the system identification is that with the acceleration time, constant
velocity time and deceleration time evenly divided, and the current condition that the peak equals
to the rated current.
Fastest ptn button
Click this button and the operation setting that provides the maximum load applied to the motor is
calculated from the start position, end position and carrier load, and set to the system identification
setting.
(Note) For the fastest ptn setting, the information of the start position, end position and carrier load is
necessary.
13. Off Board Tuning Function
Start button
Click this button and the actuator starts to operate back and forth with the provided operation setting.
(Note) The operation of the actuator automatically stops once the buffering of 30,000 records is finished.
Stop button
Click this button to interrupt the system identification.
(Note) If clicking Stop button before obtaining the number of data necessary for the system identification
from the controller (at least 15,000 data for each velocity and current), the system identification
calculation would not be carried out.
(Note) Even if not clicking Stop button, it will automatically stop once the maximum obtainable number
of data (30,000 data) is obtained from the controller.
216
[4] System Identification Result
Result display for system
identification calculation
Tool button
System identification operation graph
Fig. 13.21 System Identification Result Display
Tool button
Fig. 13.22 Tool button (Carrier load Select Window)
Save with a new name
Click this button and the data of the waveforms for the velocity and current shown in the system
identification test run result graph is saved as a csv file.
Zoom in/out of Vertical Axis
Click this button to zoom in/out the vertical axis of the system identification operation graph.
Zoom in/out of Horizontal Axis
Click this button to zoom in/out the horizontal axis of the system identification operation graph.
Displayed Data Switchover
The data (velocity/current) shown on the test run result graph can be switched over with this radio
button.
217
13. Off Board Tuning Function
Result display for system identification calculation
In here, shows the result of the system identification calculation.
System identification operation graph
Fig. 13.23 System Identification Result Graph (Velocity (Resp))
13. Off Board Tuning Function
The graph for the data selected with the displayed data switchover radio button is shown.
218
13.5.4 Explanations for each Item in Select adjustment method Window
Set the gain adjustment method in this window.
[1] Select Adjust gain set No.
[2] Select adjustment method
Fig. 13.24 Select adjustment method Window
Table for Gain Set Number and Parameter No.
Parameter No.
Parameter Name
Set No.0
Set No.1
Set No.2
Servo-Motor Gain Number
7
120
126
Position Feed Forward Gain
71
121
127
Speed Loop Proportional Gain
31
122
128
Speed Loop Integral Gain
32
123
129
Torque Filter Time Constant
33
124
130
Current Control Band Number
54
125
131
219
Set No.3
132
133
134
135
136
137
13. Off Board Tuning Function
[1] Select Adjust gain set No.
Select the gain set number which the adjusted gain is to be sent. The relation of the gain set numbers
and the parameters where the gain is sent to is as shown below.
(Note) The gain set number where the gain is adjusted to would not be shown when in the offline work.
[2] Select adjustment method
Base ctrl band
Simple tuning Setting
Manual Setting
Fig. 13.25 Select adjustment method
Base ctrl band
Select this radio button and click on Next button to perform the gain adjustment by the base control
band.
The base control band setting suits to a case when the automatic calculation of the gain considering the
carrier load is required, but it is not necessary to increase the responsiveness.
Simple tuning Setting
13. Off Board Tuning Function
Fig. 13.26 Simple tuning Setting
Select this radio button and click on Next button to perform the gain adjustment based on the selected
tuning.
The simple tuning suits to a case when the automatic calculation of the gain considering the carrier load
is required, and the increase of the responsiveness is also necessary.
The tuning can be selected from the following four items;
Tuning and Explanation
Explanation
The optimum rule for the selected actuator is selected, and adjustment is made
based on the selected rule.
(Note) Optimum rule : This is a rule that considers the generation the vibration and
Default
noise, selected from the three rules, Tight, Ratio and Stiff,
and also the responsiveness is increased as much as
possible at the same time.
This rule possesses the highest increase of the responsiveness among the three,
Tight
but has the highest risk of vibration and noise generations.
The increase of the responsiveness is higher than Stiff, but lower than Tight. The
Ratio
risk of vibration and noise is lower than Tight, but higher than Stiff.
This rule possesses the lowest risk of the generation of vibration and noise among
Stiff
the three, but has the lowest increase of the responsiveness.
(Note) The explanations of Tight, Ratio and Stiff stated above are the tendency when the carrier load is
smaller than the rated transportable weight. The tendency flows the other way around when the
carrier load is larger than the rated transportable weight.
Tuning
220
Manual Setting
Fig. 13.27 Manual Setting
Select this radio button and click the Next button, and then the Manual window will show up.
The manual suits to a case when it is necessary to set the value which the gain calculation is based on
individually considering the target (directionality of the adjustment).
Directionality
Directionality for the adjustment in the Manual window can be selected. The directionality can be
selected from the following four items.
• Control vibration
• Control noise
• Increase responsiveness
• Increase external disturbance suppression
221
13. Off Board Tuning Function
Basis gain
Select the gain that the adjustment is based on in the Manual window. The basis gain can be selected
from the following seven items.
• Origin gain
• Adjustment record gain
• Base control band (basis gain) at rated load
• Simple tuning gain (Default)
• Simple tuning gain (Tight)
• Simple tuning gain (Ratio)
• Simple tuning gain (Stiff)
(Note) Origin gain is selectable only when the adjustment record data which the origin gain has been
stored was selected in “Select actuator” window, or while in the online work and when the new
adjustment model is selected.
(Note) Adjustment record gain is selectable only when the adjustment record data is selected in “Select
actuator” window.
The band setting used in the calculation of the adjustment gain stored in the adjustment record
data selected in the model select window will be the initial value in the manual adjustment window
of this time.
[Parameter Transfer]
In the online work a message box appears in the following timings;
• When “Base control band” is selected and the Next button is clicked in the Select adjustment method
window
• When “Simple tuning” is selected and the Next button is clicked in the Select adjustment method window
Fig. 13.28 Confirmation of Parameter Transfer
When Yes is clicked
When No is clicked
When Cancel is clicked
: The adjusted gain is sent to the set adjustment gain set number and the test
run window is displayed.
: The test run window is displayed without the adjusted gain being sent.
: The adjusted gain is not sent and the test run window is also not displayed.
If the adjusted gain is sent, a message box asking you to reboot the controller will show up. (The message box
for the confirmation of servo-off at reboot is displayed only when the servo is on.)
Click on Yes button in each box to reboot the controller.
13. Off Board Tuning Function
(Note) The sent parameters will be reflected to the setting after the reboot of the controller. Reboot the
controller first if a test run is desired with the sent parameters.
Fig. 13.29 Confirmation for Controller Reboot
Fig. 13.30 Confirmation for Servo-off at Reboot
222
13.5.5 Explanations for each Item in Manual Window
Perform the gain adjustment with operating each adjustment switches in this window.
[1] Manual Setting
[2] Adjustment Status Display
[3] Adjustment Band Settings
223
13. Off Board Tuning Function
Fig. 13.31 Manual Window
[1] Manual Setting
Fig. 13.32 Manual Setting
Basis gain
The basis gain for the adjustment set in “Select adjustment method” window is displayed.
Directionality
The directionality for the adjustment set in “Select adjustment method” window is displayed.
Content
Select the content of the adjustment. The content can be selected from the following four items. Select
an appropriate content if an improvement is required at the same time in addition to the directionality of
the adjustment.
• Control vibration
• Control noise
• Increase responsiveness
• Increase external disturbance suppression
(Note) The main frame of the adjustment is what is selected as the directionality for the adjustment. If an
adjustment with the adjustment content as the main frame is required, make a change to the
setting of the directionality for the adjustment.
13. Off Board Tuning Function
Reflct viscs frct.
Put a check mark in this check box to add a consideration of the viscous friction to the gain calculation.
224
[2] Adjustment Status Display
Fig. 13.33 Adjustment Status Display
Display of interlock
adjuster switch under
influence
Display of status
change in each
direction
Display of adjustment degree
Fig. 13.34 Adjustment Status Display
Status Change in each Adjustment Direction and Arrow Displays
Adjustment
Status Change
Direction
Left
Right
No impact
Improved
Worsened
Possibly worsened
If taking PI Break Frequency in Figure 13.31 as an example, it can be defined that;
• the vibration, abnormal noise and overshoot can be improved if an adjustment is made to the left
(to make the setting smaller),but the remaining items would not be improved.
225
13. Off Board Tuning Function
Display of status change in each direction
This shows the change of the status from the current ones in each adjustment direction for the five items
listed on the left side of the window. The meanings of the displayed arrows are as explained in the
following table;
Display of adjustment degree
This shows the degree of the adjustment against the initial condition of each adjustment switch for the
five items listed on the left side of the window. The left side of the gauge extends if it is worsened and the
right side extends when there is an improvement.
The gauge for the adjustment degree is displayed in 2 steps. The worsened gauge changes as “yellow
 red” while improved gauge goes “light blue  blue”.
Fig. 13.35 Adjustment Degree (Improved)
(most worsened condition)
Fig. 13.36 Adjustment Degree (Improved)
(most improved condition)
Only red in the worsened gauge is the most worsened condition while only blue in the improved gauge is
the most improved condition that can currently be improved the most.
If taking PI Break Frequency in Figure 13.31 as an example, it can be defined that;
• the vibration, abnormal noise and overshoot are improved from the initial condition, and
• the response and suppress disturb are worsened from the initial condition.
(Note) The display of the adjustment degree is a relative display compared with the initial conditions at
the start when the Manual window is opened.
(Note) If an adjustment is made to the control velocity band, it will give an impact to the overshooting
degrees for the position gain, PI break frequency, control current band and torque filter.
13. Off Board Tuning Function
Display of interlocked adjustment switch under influence
This shows the adjustment switches which are influenced by the adjustment degree and overshooting
degree when the interlocked adjustment switches are operated.
is displayed.
An influence is given when Interlock adjuster 1 is operated if
An influence is given when Interlock adjuster 2 is operated if
is displayed.
(Note) The number of interlock adjuster may differ depending on the directionality, content and the
manual data version.
226
[3] Adjustment Band Settings
Fig. 13.37 Adjustment Band Settings
Band setting scroll bar
Band setting display
Band setting degree display
Fig. 13.38 Adjustment Band Settings (Pos Gain)
Band setting scroll bar
By operating this scroll bar, the band setting of the switch can be changed.
(Note) The operation is available only on the switches that are available for adjustment only.
Band setting display
In here, displays the current band setting.
Band setting degree display
In here, displays the degree of the current band setting. The gauge changes in the order of blue  light
blue  yellow  red. Higher the setting gets, the closer the color of the gauge comes to red.
Band setting scroll bar
Torque filter bandwidth inactivated (Version V9.02.00.00 or later)
Torque filter bandwidth inactivated
Fig. 13.40 Torque filter bandwidth inactivated
The settings are as shown below for when there is a tick in the checkbox for the torque filter bandwidth
inactivated and there is no check.
Check
When there is a tick ()
When there is no tick (blank)
Adjustment Gain Torque Filter Time Constant
0
Value calculated from torque filter bandwidth setting
(Note) Even when there is a tick in the checkbox, changes can be made in the torque filter bandwidth
itself and the setting in the torque filter bandwidth by the interlocking adjuster.
(Note) When the manual adjustment window is shown from the adjustment method select window, and
when the torque filter constant in the adjustment gain is 0, the tick in the checkbox is kept ().
227
13. Off Board Tuning Function
Fig. 13.39 Interlock adjuster Band Setting
Band setting scroll bar
By operating this scroll bar, the band setting can be changed by the interlock adjuster.
By utilizing the interlock adjuster, the band setting for a several switches can be changed at the same
time.
(Note) The combinations of the interlock adjuster the band setting is changed at the same time may
differ depending on the directionality and content.
(Note) The operation is available only on the interlock adjuster that are available for adjustment only.
[Parameter Transfer]
In the offline work a message box appears in the following timings;
• When Next button is clicked in the Manual window
Fig. 13.41 Confirmation of Parameter Transfer
When Yes is clicked
When No is clicked
When Cancel is clicked
: The adjusted gain is sent to the set adjustment gain set number and the test
run window is displayed.
: The test run window is displayed without the adjusted gain being sent.
: The adjusted gain is not sent and the test run window is also not displayed.
If the adjusted gain is sent, a message box asking you to reboot the controller will show up. (The message box
for the confirmation of servo-off at reboot is displayed only when the servo is on.)
Click on Yes button in each box to reboot the controller.
13. Off Board Tuning Function
(Note) The sent parameters will be reflected to the setting after the reboot of the controller. Reboot the
controller first if a test run is desired with the sent parameters.
Fig. 13.42 Confirmation for Controller Reboot
Fig. 13.43 Confirmation for Servo-off at Reboot
228
13.5.6 Explanations for each Item in Test run Window
A test run of the actuator is available with using the adjusted gain in this window.
(Note) The test run function is available only in the online work. When it is offline the screen shows as shown in
the Fig. 13.46 and the test run function cannot be used.
(Note) SCON-CAL/CGAL can perform a trial run, but the result cannot be displayed. (Fig. 13.45)
[1] Tuning Setting/Result Display
[2] Test run setting
Fig. 13.44 Test run Window (in online work)
229
13. Off Board Tuning Function
[3] Test run result Display
13. Off Board Tuning Function
Fig. 13.45 Test run Window (in online work of SCON-CAL/CGAL)
230
Fig. 13.46 Test run Window (in offline work)
[1] Tuning Setting/Result Display
Gain display
Fig. 13.48 Gain display (Test run Window)
Fig. 13.47 Tuning Setting (When Manual)
Adjustment method select setting display
The tuning method set in “Select Tuning Method” window is displayed.
(Note) The display differs depending on the selected tuning method. The display for the modes other
than the Manual is as shown below.
Fig. 13.49 Tuning Setting
(at base ctrl band)
Fig. 13.50 Tuning Setting
(at Simple tuning)
231
13. Off Board Tuning Function
Adjustment method
select setting display
Gain display
Shows the gain indicated in the used gain set number for the test run setting. The selection is to be
made from the following two;
• Adjustment gain : Shows the adjustment gain. The gain set number shows “-” as shown in the
figure below when the adjustment gain is not sent to the controller.
• Test run gain
: Shows the gain indicated in the used gain set number for the test run setting.
Fig. 13.51 Adjustment Gain Display (Test run Window) (not sent)
[2] Test run setting
Fig. 13.52 Test run setting
13. Off Board Tuning Function
Start pos (mm)
Set the test run start position.
(Note) In the test run, the actuator runs through between the start position and end position once.
End pos (mm)
Set the test run end position.
(Note) In the test run, the actuator runs through between the start position and end position once.
Vel (mm/s)
Set the test run velocity.
Acc (G)
Set the test run acceleration.
Dcl (G)
Set the test run deceleration.
Use gain set No.
Set the gain set number used in the test run.
Complete pos
It can be set at what coordinates the actuator is to be stopped after the back and forth operation for the
test run.
The selection is to be made from the following two;
• Soft limit –
: Stops on the soft limit – side (origin side)
• Start Position : Stops at the start position set in the identification setting
232
Drv Mode
Set the operation mode during test run.
The following two items can be selected for the operation mode.
• Trapezoid
• S motion
(Note) When Operation Start button is clicked, a message box may open to confirm the change to the S
motion parameter depending on the parameter settings.
Select Yes and the following user parameters are changed as described, and the test run starts
executed.
<Parameters to be changed>
Set value
Trapezoid
S-shape
(Note 1)
No.56 “Sigmoid motion ratio setting [%]”
Original Setting
100
No.71 “Position feed-forward gain”
Original Setting (Note 1)
90
(Note 1) If a change has made to the S motion operation parameter in “Cycle
time calculation” window, the parameter for the trapezoid operation is
changed from the original values to that of S motion operation.
Name
Select No and the test run is cancelled with no change to the parameters.
Fig. 13.53 Confirmation message for Change to S motion Operation Parameter
13. Off Board Tuning Function
233
Start button
Click this button to start the test run.
(Note) Without clicking on Stop button, the test run automatically finishes at the end.
(Note) In some cases of start position and end position settings, the following message may appear. In
the case this message is displayed, change the start position and end position so the moving
distance can be long enough.
Fig. 13.54 Operation Unable Message due to Moving Distance too short
(Note) The following message may appear depending on the combination of the velocity and
acceleration/deceleration. The message will no longer appear if the setting is changed to that with
acceleration time less than 2.0 [sec] for the velocity and acceleration/deceleration.
13. Off Board Tuning Function
Fig. 13.55 Compulsory Trapezoid Operation Message
(Note) A message box may open for the overshooting alarm depending on the operation settings.
Select Yes and the test run operation can be executed. To make the warning not to appear,
change the operation setting so the acceleration time becomes longer.
Fig. 13.56 Overshoot Warning Message
Stop button
Click this button and the test run is cancelled.
234
[3] Test Run Result Display
Test run result Graph
Tool button
Fig. 13.57 Test run result Display
Tool button
Fig. 13.58 Tool button (Test run Window)
Saving Test run result File
Click this button and the data of the waveforms for the velocity and current for the test run result is saved
as a bsmrc or csv file.
Zoom in/out of Vertical Axis
Click these buttons to zoom in and out the vertical axis of the test run result.
Zoom in/out of Horizontal Axis
Click these buttons to zoom in and out the horizontal axis of the test run result.
Displayed Data Switchover
The data (velocity/current) shown on the test run result graph can be switched over with this radio
button.
235
13. Off Board Tuning Function
Reading File for Comparison
Click on this button and a file is read and drawn on the same graph to compare with the test run result.
Test run result Graph
Positioning Complete Time
Fig. 13.59 Test run result Graph (Velocity (Resp))
13. Off Board Tuning Function
The graph for the data selected with the displayed data switchover radio button is shown.
The vertical red line and PEND display on the top right indicated with the arrows show the positioning
complete time.
236
13.5.7 Explanations for each Item in Adjustment record data save Window
[1] Adjustment Record Data Display
[2] Save new record
/Over write present record
Fig. 13.60 Adjustment record save Window
Gain Set No. Select
Fig. 13.61 Origin gain (Adjustment record data save Window)
Comment Input Box
Fig. 13.62 Comment Box (Adjustment record data save Window)
237
13. Off Board Tuning Function
[1] Adjustment Record Data Display
Data saved as the adjustment record can be displayed. For the two items shown below, the display and
function change from the adjustment record data display in “Select actuator” window.
Gain Set No. Select
Select the gain set number that is to be saved as the origin gain. At the time the Off board tuning window
is activated, the gain set selected from the gain sets No. 0 to 3 set to the controller can be saved.
If the origin gain is already saved to the adjustment record data at the time “Adjustment record” was
chosen in “Select actuator” window, the origin gain saved in the adjustment record can be saved by
selecting “*” in the gain set number in the following window.
Fig. 13.63 Gain Set Number Select
(when origin gain is saved in adjustment record)
(Note) “*” can be displayed only when the origin gain is saved in the adjustment record data.
(Note) The display of the gain set No. select changes to the one as shown below when it is offline.
13. Off Board Tuning Function
Fig. 13.64 Display of Origin gain
(Adjustment record data save Window)
(with no origin gain)
Fig. 13.65 Display of Origin gain
(Adjustment record data save Window)
(with origin gain)
Comment Input Box
A comment to save in the adjustment record can be input. The comment can be made with 32 half-sized
characters at the maximum.
[2] Save new record/Over write present record button
Save new record button
Click on this button and the adjustment record displayed on the Adjustment record data display ([1] in
Adjustment record data save window) can be additionally saved.
Over write present record button
Click on this button and the file can be overwritten to the adjustment record of the data number in the
Adjustment record data display ([1] in Adjustment record data save window).
(Note) Overwriting is available only after the adjustment record currently displayed is already saved at
least once, or when “Adjustment record” is chosen in “Select actuator” window.
238
13.6 Operations in Cycle Time calculation
To conduct the cycle time calculation, click on the Cycle Time Calculation button in the Off board tuning
window.
(Note) “Cycle time calculation” window can be opened from “Test run” window or “Adjustment record data
save” window.
Cycle Time Calculation button
Fig. 13.66 Common Buttons Area in Off board tuning Window
13.6.1 Explanations for each Item in Cycle Time calculation Window
Cycle time calculation can be performed in this window.
[1] Display Switchover Tab
[1] Display Switchover Tab
With these tabs, the displays of “Test run plan Setting” window and “Test run result Display” window can
be switched over.
239
13. Off Board Tuning Function
Fig. 13.67 Cycle time calculation Window (Test run plan Setting Window)
13.6.2 Test run plan Setting Window
The settings of operation pattern to be held for cycle time calculation can be conducted in this window. The
maximum operation patterns available to set are 10 patterns.
[1] Friction Display Area
[3] Operation
Pattern Setting
Tool Buttons
[2] Operation Pattern Setting Grid
[4] Parameter Setting
13. Off Board Tuning Function
Fig. 13.68 Test run plan Setting Window
[1] Friction Display Area
Fig. 13.69 Friction Display Area
Viscs frct
In here, shows the coefficient of viscous friction. The setting unit is [Nms].
Dynmic frct
In here, shows the kinetic friction torque. The setting unit is [Nm].
Tuning
The adjustment method used in the gain calculation is displayed.
240
[2] Operation Pattern Setting Grid
Set the operation patterns to have cycle time calculation. Once the cycle time calculation is complete,
the operation pattern can be copied and pasted to Position Data Edit window.
Fig. 13.70 Operation Pattern Setting Grid
Load (kg)
Set the carrier load.
(Note) Only the ratio of load can be reflected to the calculation for the setting of carrier load.
Pos (mm)
Set the position.
The top line (No. S) is the start position setting cell.
Vel (mm/s)
Set the velocity.
Dcl (G)
Set the deceleration.
INP (mm)
Set the positioning width.
SMotion
Set the operation type from trapezoid and S motion operations, which is to be used for the cycle time
calculation. The numbers corresponding to the trapezoid and S motion operations are as shown below.
• Trapezoid : 0
• S Motion
:1
241
13. Off Board Tuning Function
Acc (G)
Set the acceleration.
INC
Set the movement type from absolute move and incremental move, which is to be used for the cycle time
calculation. The numbers corresponding to the absolute and incremental moves are as shown below.
• Absolute
:0
• Incremental : 1
Gain Set
Set the gain set number used for the cycle time calculation.
Rest time (s)
Set the rest time.
[3] Operation Pattern Setting Tool Buttons
Fig. 13.71 Operation Pattern Setting Tool Buttons
Fastest ptn button
Click on this button and the operation pattern can be set in the selected line to maximize the load applied
to the motor.
(Note) Fastest operation setting cannot be executed as long as the carrier load and movement distance
settings are incomplete.
13. Off Board Tuning Function
Copy button
Click this button to copy the content of selected cell.
Paste button
Click this button to paste the copied content to the selected cell.
Ins 1 line button
Click this button to insert a blank line to the selected cell.
Del 1 line button
Click this button to delete the content of the selected line and let the lines below the deleted line go up by
one line.
Del all line button
Click this button to delete all the settings in the operation pattern setting grid.
Execute button
Click this button to execute the cycle time calculation with the operation pattern set to the operation
pattern setting grid.
242
[4] Parameter Setting
Fig. 13.72 Parameter Setting
Change parameter for S Motion
Click this button to change the following parameters for the gain set indicated in the operation pattern
that the cycle time calculation is already complete with S motion operation.
<Parameters to be changed>
Name
Set value
No.56 “Sigmoid motion ratio setting [%]”
100
No.** “Position feed-forward gain”
90
** : The position feed-forward gain corresponding to the gain set
number set to the operation pattern is to be applied.
Restore parameter
The gain set with the parameters changed can be returned to the parameter settings at the startup of the
cycle time calculation window with Change parameter for S Motion button.
13. Off Board Tuning Function
243
13.6.3 Test run result Display Window
[1] Test run result Time
Display Area
[2] Test run result Graph
Display Area
Fig. 13.73 Test run result Display Window
[1] Test run result Time Display Area
13. Off Board Tuning Function
Pattern select
Fig. 13.74 Test run result Time Display Area
244
Pattern select
Select the pattern to be displayed in the cycle time calculation result graph with this combo box.
The pattern numbers that the cycle time calculation was held with are available to choose.
INP time (s)
The positioning time for the pattern selected in the Pattern select is shown.
Cycle time (s)
The cycle time for the pattern selected in the Pattern select is shown.
Cycle time is the sum of positioning time and pause time.
Load factor (%)
The load factor for the pattern selected in the Pattern select is shown.
Accum. cycle time (s)
The accumulative cycle time for those from Pattern 1 to the pattern selected in the Pattern select is
shown.
Accum. load factor (%)
The accumulative load factor for those from Pattern 1 to the pattern selected in the Pattern select is
shown.
Total cycle time (s)
In here, shows the total cycle time of all the patterns included in the cycle time calculation.
Total factor load (%)
The total load factor for all the patterns the cycle time calculation is conducted on is shown.
13. Off Board Tuning Function
245
[2] Test run result Graph Display Area
Test run result Graph
Tool button
Fig. 13.75 Test run result Graph Display
Tool button
Fig. 13.76 Tool button (Cycle Time Calculation Window)
13. Off Board Tuning Function
Zoom in/out of Vertical Axis
Click this button to zoom in/out the vertical axis of the operation graph.
Zoom in/out of Horizontal Axis
Click this button to zoom in/out the horizontal axis of the operation graph.
Displayed Data Switchover
The data (velocity/position) shown on the cycle time calculation result graph can be switched over with
this radio button.
Also, by putting a check mark in Rated cur ratio check box, the waveform for the rated current ratio can
be displayed on the cycle time calculation result graph.
246
Test run result Graph
Fig. 13.77 Test run result Graph (Velocity Responsiveness)
The data selected with the check box on the displayed data switchover radio button can be shown.
13. Off Board Tuning Function
247
14.
Frequency Analysis for Vibration Control
(Version V8.00.00.00 or later of SCON-CA, Version
V9.02.00.00 or later of MSCON, Version V9.07.00.00 or later
for SCON-CAL/CGAL, V10.00.00.00 or later for SCON-CB)
Note: As servo monitoring cannot be performed on SCON-CAL/CGAL, it is not available to operate an
actuator, take in the measurement data (sampling), and export the vibration frequency of the load.
Import measurement data externally taken by a measurement device, have an FFT analysis and set the
vibration control parameters.
(Note) To use the frequency analysis for vibration control function, you must install the key file (Fam.dll file).
Contact IAI for information on how you can obtain the key file (Fam.dll file).
14. Frequency Analysis for Vibration Control
[Setting up the vibration suppression frequency analysis function]
Move the key file (Fam.dll file) you have obtained to the folder in which the execution file of the “RcPc RC PC
Software” is stored.
Example of storage folder: C:¥Program Files¥IAI¥RoboCylinder
Key file
(Fam.dll file)
RC PC
software
Fig. 14.1 RC PC Software Execution File Folder
After the key file has been moved, start the RC PC software and then click Parameter (P) menu and select
Control Parameter Setup (C). The “Frequency analysis for vibration control (F)” window will appear, where
you can perform frequency analysis for vibration control.
248
14.1 Operation Overview
(Note) The following new controller data cannot be imported for SCON-CAL/CGAL.
Import measurement data externally taken by a measurement device, have an FFT analysis and set the
vibration control parameters.
A general operation flow from measuring the vibration frequency of the load whose vibration you want to
suppress, to setting the applicable parameters, is shown below.
[For each window, refer to 14.2, “Explanation of Each Window.]
[For the specific operations, refer to 14.3, “Operations”]
[1] Select the measurement data.
Select “Import new controller data” so that you can move the actuator and import vibration data to
measure the vibration frequency of the load.
You can also read external measurement data to measure the vibration frequency of the load.
Fig. 14.2 Measurement Data Selection Window
[2] If you have selected “Import new controller data,” move the actuator and import vibration data to
measure the vibration frequency of the load. The imported vibration data is displayed under
“Measurement Data.”
FFT analysis must be performed to extract the vibration frequency of the load. As a preparation for this
analysis, set the necessary items such as the range of FFT analysis using the measurement data you
have just imported.
Data used for
FFT analysis
Fig. 14.3 Measurement Data Display/Analysis Details Setting Window
249
14. Frequency Analysis for Vibration Control
Imported
vibration data
[3] Perform FFT analysis of the desired data to extract the vibration frequency of the load.
FFT analysis
result
Fig. 14.4 Analysis Result Display Window
14. Frequency Analysis for Vibration Control
[4] Set the characteristic vibration frequency in the “Peak Freq [Hz]” field, and then select Forward to
Controller and set the parameters.
FFT analysis
result
Fig. 14.5 Analysis Result Display Window
250
14.2 Explanation of Each Window
14.2.1 Measurement Data Selection Window
This window is used to select measurement data.
Click the Parameter (P) menu, point to Controller Parameter Setup (C), and then select Frequency
Analysis for Vibration Control (F), and the measurement data selection window will appear.
(Note) [1] Import new controller data cannot be selected in SCON-CAL/CGAL.
[1] Import new controller data
[2] Read external measurement data file
[3] Read analytical already data file
Fig. 14.6 Measurement Data Selection (“Import New Controller Data” Selected)
[1] Import new controller data
Select this option if you want to move the connected actuator and import (sample) measurement data to
extract and set the vibration frequency of the load.
The frequency analysis for vibration control window (Fig. 14.10) appears where you can perform FFT
analysis of the imported measurement data (sampled data).
Select the axis number under which to set the vibration frequency of the load.
[1] Select the axis number under which to import controller data.
251
14. Frequency Analysis for Vibration Control
Fig. 14.7 Measurement Data Selection
[2] Read external measurement data file
Select this option if you want to read an external measurement data file containing data measured with a
measuring equipment, etc., to perform FFT analysis and extract the vibration frequency of the load.
You can select a desired existing analysis file by clicking the file browse button. Or, enter the file name
directly in the file path display/file history field.
When the file has been selected, click OK.
The frequency analysis for vibration control window (Fig. 14.10) appears where you can perform FFT
analysis.
Any external measurement data file having the extension “csv” or “txt” can be read.
This option is selectable regardless of whether the controller is online or offline or regardless of the
model of the connected actuator.
Clicking Cancel closes the measurement data selection window.
[1] Select a file in the file path display/file history field.
[2] File browse button
14. Frequency Analysis for Vibration Control
Fig. 14.8 Measurement Data Selection
(“Read External Measurement Data File” Selected)
252
[3] Read analytical already data file
Select this option if you want to read an existing analytical data file.
You can select a desired existing analytical data file by clicking the file browse button. Or, enter the file
name directly in the file path display/file history field.
Click OK.
If the extension of the file you have read is “fmdrc,” the frequency analysis for vibration control window
(Fig. 13.10) appears where you can perform FFT analysis.
If the file extension is “fds,” the “analysis result display” window (Fig. 14.10) appears where you can
display the analysis result saved in the file.
This option is selectable regardless of whether the controller is online or offline or regardless of the
model of the connected actuator.
Clicking Cancel closes the measurement data selection window.
[1] Select a file in the file path display/file history field.
[2] File browse button
Fig. 14.9 Measurement Data Selection
(“Read Analytical Already Data File” Selected)
14. Frequency Analysis for Vibration Control
253
14.2.2 Sampling Window
This window is used to import vibration data from the controller by moving the actuator. (SCON-CAL/CGAL
cannot import the vibration data by operating an actuator.)
You can also perform various operations in this window, such as setting the range of data used in FFT analysis
after vibration data has been imported from the controller or external measurement data or existing analysis
data (extension “fmd”) has been read.
When you select the “Import new controller data,” “Read external measurement data file” or “Read analytical
already data file (extension “fmd”)” option in the measurement data selection window, the display switches to
this window.
14. Frequency Analysis for Vibration Control
[1] Tool buttons
[2] Sampling/FFT analysis result window switching
[7] Execute FFT analysis
[3] FFT analysis setting
[4] Sampling setting
[5] Measurement data
[6] Data to be analyzed
Fig. 14.10 Sampling Window
254
[1] Tool buttons
Fig. 14.11 Tool Buttons
Save As
Clicking this button opens the pop-up menu where you can select the type of data to be saved to a file.
Select the applicable data type in this menu and save the selected data to a file under a desired name.
Fig. 14.12 File Save Data Type Selection Pop-up Menu
Only data of the supported data types can be saved.
For example, assume that measurement data is displayed but FFT analysis result is not yet displayed. In
this case, the following conditions apply:
• Save measurement data: Selectable
• Save FFT result data: Not selectable
Fig. 14.13 File Save Data Type Selection (Only “Save Measurement Data” Selectable)
Print
Clicking this button opens the “print setting” window where you can select desired print settings.
[For the print setting, refer to 14.2.4, “Print Setting Window.]
255
14. Frequency Analysis for Vibration Control
Edit Position Data
Clicking this button launches the position data edit window (online edit window) where you can edit position
data.
This button is selectable only when “Import new controller data” was selected in the “measurement data
selection” window.
[2] Sampling/FFT analysis result window switching tabs
Fig. 14.14 Sampling/FFT Analysis Result Window Switching Tabs
You can click a desired tab to switch between the sampling window and FFT analysis result window.
[For the FFT analysis result window, refer to 14.2.3, “Analysis Result Display Window.”]
The selectable tab is shown with black text, while the text on the unavailable tab is grayed out. The currently
selected tab is indicated by blue text.
[3] FFT setting
Analysis start time [sec]
Data used
Number of thinning
Analysis time [sec]
Frequency resolution [Hz]
Window function selection
Sight application of
window function
14. Frequency Analysis for Vibration Control
Fig. 14.15 Axis-specific Setting Items
256
Analysis Start Time [sec]
Specify the start position of the range of measurement data to be used for FFT analysis, in units of [sec].
Enter a value directly in the input field or click the buttons on the right side of the input field to change the
current setting, to set the analysis start time.
You can also set a desired analysis time by dragging the mouse while holding down the right button over
the measurement data graph to move the two red vertical lines displayed on the graph.
Note, however, that the end of the data to be analyzed cannot exceed the end of the measurement data.
Any change to the set analysis start time will not be reflected in the FFT analysis result unless FFT analysis
is performed again.
If the data has been read from an existing analytical data file (file extension: fmd), the new setting will be
saved when the file is saved.
Analysis start time
Analysis time
Fig. 14.16 Changing Analysis Start Time on Measurement Data Graph
257
14. Frequency Analysis for Vibration Control
Num of Use Data
Set the total number of data to be analyzed. Clicking the T button on the right displays a list, where you can
select a desired number. The following values can be set, but the set value cannot exceed the total number
of data to be analyzed:
• 128
• 256
• 512
• 1024
• 2048
• 4096
• 8192
• 16384
Any change to the set number of use data will not be reflected in the FFT analysis result unless FFT
analysis is performed again.
If the data has been read from an existing analytical data file (file extension: fmd/fsd), the new setting will be
saved when the file is saved.
The default value of 4096 is set immediately after the PC software has been installed.
Num of Thinning
Set how many data will be skipped before the next analysis data is adopted when the data to be analyzed is
generated from the measurement data. Enter a value directly in the input field or click the buttons on the
right side of the input field to change the current setting.
Any value between 0 and 31 can be set, but the number of measurement data cannot exceed the total
number of data to be analyzed that has been generated through thinning.
The following is the example of how data to be analyzed is generated when the number of thinning is set.
[Example] How data to be analyzed is generated when the number of thinning is set to “2”
• The number in each cell represents a measurement data number, where measurement data are
arranged in the order of 0, 1, 2, 3...
• Generation of data to be analyzed starts from measurement data 0.
Measurement data
0
1
2
3
0
4
3
5
6
7
6
9
12
Data to be analyzed
8
9
10
…
…
Hereafter data will be adopted
in the same manner until the
number of use data is reached.
14. Frequency Analysis for Vibration Control
Fig. 14.17 Relationship of Measurement Data and Data to Be Analyzed
In the above example, the number of thinning is set to “2,” meaning that every third measurement data is
adopted for analysis.
(Note) Any change to the set number of thinning will be reflected only when FFT analysis is performed.
Unless FFT analysis performed, the change will not be reflected in the FFT analysis result.
(Note) If the data has been read from an existing analytical data file (file extension: fmd), the new setting
will be saved when the file is saved.
(Note) The default value of 0 is set immediately after the PC software has been installed.
258
AnalyzTime [sec]
The range of data to be analyzed you have just set is indicated in [sec].
The analysis time is calculated from the number of use data and number of thinning.
If the data has been read from an existing analytical data file (file extension: fsd), the new setting will be
saved when the file is saved.
In the measurement data, the range of data to be analyzed, which is determined from the analysis start time
[sec], number of use data and number of thinning, is indicated by two red vertical lines on the measurement
data graph (the two vertical lines indicated by the arrows in the figure below).
Analysis
start time
Analysis time
Fig. 14.18 Indication of Range of Data to Be Analyzed on Measurement Data Graph
The data in the set range is shown under “Analytical object data” at the bottom of the window.
Data used for FFT analysis
Fig. 14.19 Frequency Analysis for Vibration Control Window
259
14. Frequency Analysis for Vibration Control
Imported vibration data
FreqResol [Hz]
The effective frequency resolution of FFT analysis is indicated.
This value indicates the resolution of FFT analysis result. FFT analysis result data are integer multiples of
the frequency resolution.
Window Func
Select the window function to be applied to the data to be analyzed in FFT analysis.
One of the following four window functions can be selected:
• Rectangle
• Hanning
• Humming
• Blackman
General shapes of window functions are shown below for your reference.
Fig. 14.20 Rectangle
Fig. 14.21 Hanning
Fig. 14.22 Humming
Fig. 14.23 Blackman
14. Frequency Analysis for Vibration Control
Any change to the set window function will not be reflected in the FFT analysis result unless FFT analysis
performed again.
If the data has been read from an existing analytical data file (file extension: fmd), the new setting will be
saved when the file is saved.
The default value of “Hanning” is set immediately after the PC software has been installed.
Sight Application Func
When this check box is selected, the window function is applied to the data to be analyzed and
function-applied data is displayed. If the check box is cleared, the data to be analyzed to which window
function is not yet applied is displayed.
Regardless of this setting, FFT analysis is performed on the data to which the window function has been
applied.
The “Sight application function” box is cleared by default immediately after the PC software has been
installed.
The “Sight application function” of number of use data, number of thinning, window function selection and
window function saves the measurement axis settings which become the default value at the start next time
onward.
Note however that if an existing analytical data file (file extension: fmd) is read, the number sent to the file is
set.
260
[4] Sampling setting
Data type selection
Linked driving start
Position number selection
Wait time setting
Start/Stop buttons
Fig. 14.24 All-axis Setting Items
These settings are available only when “Import new controller data” has been selected.
Select data type
When you move the actuator to import data, the type of data corresponding to the selected check box is
imported.
Two data types of torque current response and velocity command response can be selected. Multiple data
types can be selected.
Normally torque current response data is used to extract characteristic vibration frequencies.
This item can be set only when the actuator is moved to import data after selecting “Import new controller
data.”
Link start drive
When you move the actuator to import data, driving of the actuator will start simultaneously as sampling is
started if this check box is selected.
261
14. Frequency Analysis for Vibration Control
Position number selection
If sampling is to be performed with the “Link start drive” check box selected, select the position numbers of
two points between which the actuator will move back and forth.
(Note) These boxes can be set only when “Import new controller data” has been selected.
(Note) These boxes can be set only when the “Link start drive” check box is selected.
(Note) Position data must be already set under the position numbers selected here. If any position number
is selected under which no position data is set, sampling will be cancelled.
Wait time [sec]
If sampling is to be performed with the “Link start drive” check box selected, set how long the actuator will
wait after moving to the target position, before starting the next movement.
(Note) This box can be set only when “Import new controller data” has been selected.
(Note) This box can be set only when the “Link start drive” check box is selected.
(Note) An error of approx.0.0 to 0.1 [sec] may generate between the set wait time [sec] and wait time during
actual operation.
If the wait time is set to a value other than “0.0” and sampling is performed, the actuator will wait for the
specified time and then start moving to the next target position, unless the actuator operation is stopped.
Accordingly, although the actuator may appear stopped because the set time has not elapsed, it is
actually active and may start moving suddenly. Exercise caution.
Start/Stop buttons
When importing new controller data, use these buttons to start and stop sampling.
Clicking the Start button starts sampling, while clicking the Stop buttons stops sampling.
These buttons are available only when the actuator is moved to import data.
14. Frequency Analysis for Vibration Control
Execute FFT button
Clicking this button starts FFT analysis based on the settings you have made in the FFT setting area.
If the actuator is moved to import data, FFT analysis cannot be performed unless sampling is performed.
262
[5] Measurement Data
Sampling data type selection
Graph display
range setting
Sampling interval display
Fig. 14.25 Measurement Data
Full-scale button
Measurement data graph
Imported measurement data is displayed in a graph. The vertical axis of the graph represents the amplitude
of imported waveform, while the horizontal axis represents the time.
Sampling interval display
The sampling interval of the displayed measurement data of the measurement axis is indicated.
Graph display range setting
You can change the display area of the graph by changing the values set in the four input fields.
The value set in each input field can also be changed using the buttons on the right side of the field.
Note that a range wider than the scale effective when the Full-scale button is clicked cannot be displayed.
Sampling data type selection
If new controller data is imported, you can use these radio buttons to switch the display mode between
torque current response and velocity command response.
This area is not displayed unless “Import new controller data” has been selected.
Only the data type corresponding to the sampled data can be selected.
263
14. Frequency Analysis for Vibration Control
Full-scale button
You can click this button to display the entire measurement data in a graph.
[6] Analytical object data
Analytical object data graph
Graph display
range setting
Offset
Fig. 14.26 Analytical Object Data
Full-scale button
Analytical object data graph
The current analytical object data is displayed in a graph. The vertical axis of the graph represents the
amplitude of waveform, while the horizontal axis represents the time.
Graph display range setting
You can change the display area of the graph by changing the values set in the four input fields.
The value set in each input field can also be changed using the buttons on the right side of the field.
Along the horizontal axis, a range wider than the scale effective when the Full-scale button is clicked cannot
be displayed.
14. Frequency Analysis for Vibration Control
Full-scale button
You can click this button to display the entire analytical object data in a graph.
Offset
Use this field to move the center of amplitude of analytical object data.
The settable range is from -MAX to MAX, where “MAX” indicates the maximum absolute value of
measurement data.
If the analysis start time, number of use data or number of thinning is changed, an appropriate offset will be
calculated and set automatically.
If the data has been read from an existing analytical data file (file extension: fmd), the new setting will be
saved when the file is saved.
[7] Execute FFT button
Click this button, and FFT analysis will be performed based on the settings you have made, for the axis
set as the analysis target.
264
14.2.3 Analysis Result Display Window
Setting items common to all axes on the frequency analysis for vibration control window
Clicking the Execute FFT button performs FFT analysis and the display switches to this window.
[1] FFT analysis setting data
[4] Frequency resolution
[3] Maximum value of FFT
[6] Parameter set number selection
[5] Axis number selection
Fig. 14.27 FFT Analysis Result Win
265
[7] Forward to Controller button
14. Frequency Analysis for Vibration Control
[2] Peak frequency setting
[1] FFT analysis result data
Graph display range setting
Full-scale button
FFT analysis result data graph
Fig. 14.28 FFT Analysis Result Data Graph
14. Frequency Analysis for Vibration Control
FFT analysis result data graph
FFT analysis result of the measured axis is displayed in a graph.
FFT analysis result data is displayed in a normalized pattern based on the maximum value of data being 1.
Graph display range setting
You can change the display area of the graph by changing the values set in the four input fields.
The value set in each input field can also be changed using the buttons on the right side of the field.
Note that a range wider than the scale effective when the Full-scale button is clicked cannot be displayed.
Full-scale button
Clicking this button lets you display in a graph all FFT analysis result data in the range from 0 to the
maximum frequency [Hz] that permits forwarding of data to the controller.
266
[2] Peak frequency setting
Here, set the frequency you want to set in the applicable controller parameter. Any value between 0.5
and 30 [Hz] can be set.
Enter a value directly in the input field, or click the [] button on the right side of the input field, if
candidate peak frequencies have been set, to select a desired setting from the displayed list.
The set frequency is indicated by a red vertical line on the FFT analysis result data graph.
(Note) Up to five candidate peak frequencies are identified based on the FFT analysis result and shown.
Depending on the FFT analysis result, no candidate may be found, in which case the peak
frequency may vary from the actual vibration frequency.
(Note) If the data has been read from an existing analytical data file (file extension: fsdrc), the new
setting will be saved when the file is saved.
(Note) When the “FFT analysis result” window appears after the FFT analysis, the first candidate peak
frequency is set by default. If the data has been read from an existing analytical data file (file
extension: fsdrc), the value saved in the file is set.
Fig. 14.29 Candidate Peak Frequency List
[3] Maximum value of FFT
The maximum value of FFT analysis result data before normalization is shown.
(Note) If the data has been read from an existing analytical data file (file extension: fsdrc), the new
setting will be saved when the file is saved.
(Note) This value is determined by the FFT analysis result and will not change even when settings are
changed on the “FFT analysis result” window.
267
14. Frequency Analysis for Vibration Control
Fig. 14.30 Indication of Set Value on Graph
[4] Frequency resolution
The frequency resolution of FFT analysis result is shown. The distance between adjacent plotting points
on the FFT analysis result data graph is indicated visually in [Hz].
(Note) This value is determined by the analysis time, which in turn is determined in the “sampling”
window, and will not change even when settings are changed on the “FFT analysis result”
window.
[5] Axis number selection
Set the axis number to forward the parameters to.
When new controller data is imported, the axis number selected in the “measurement data selection”
window is set. Otherwise, you can select any axis number to which data can be forwarded.
[6] Parameter set number selection
Select one of parameter sets 1 to 3 containing the parameter in which the set frequency will be set.
14. Frequency Analysis for Vibration Control
[7] Forward to Controller button
Clicking this button forwards the parameters to the controller.
(Note) If one of the following conditions applies, the parameters cannot be forwarded to the controller:
• The connected controller does not support the vibration control function.
• The system is offline.
268
14.2.4 Print Setting Window
Clicking the
Print button in the measurement data display/analysis details setting window switches the
display to this window.
Set the print options.
[1] Print setting for measurement data
[3] Print setting for FFT result data
[4] Print/Close buttons
[2] Print setting for analysis data
Fig. 14.31 Print Setting (for Both Data Types)
14. Frequency Analysis for Vibration Control
269
Print setting can be performed only for printable data types as of the time the print setting window opens.
Display examples of windows where only print setting for measurement data is possible, and print setting for
FFT result data is possible, are shown below.
Fig. 14.32 Print Setting (for Measurement Data Only)
Fig. 14.33 Print Setting (for FTT Result Data Only)
[1] Print setting for measurement data
Print type selection
Setting for print list range
14. Frequency Analysis for Vibration Control
Fig. 14.34 Print Setting for Measurement Data
Print type selection
Only the type of printing corresponding to the selected check box is performed. Details of each setting are
explained below.
(Note) If no check box is selected, data cannot be printed.
270
• Print list:
Measurement data included in the range specified in the “Setting for print list range” area is printed in the
format shown below.
Fig. 14.35 Printing Format of Measurement Data List
• Print Graph
The measurement data graph currently displayed in the “sampling” window is printed in the format shown
below.
271
14. Frequency Analysis for Vibration Control
Fig. 14.36 Printing Format of Measurement Data Graph
Setting for print list range
Set the range of data rows you want to print by entering values in the “Print start time [sec]” and “Print end
time [sec]” input fields.
Only the measurement data rows included in the range set here will be printed.
The setting unit of fields in the “Setting for print list range” area is [sec].
[2] Print setting for analysis data
Print type selection
Setting for print list range
Fig. 14.37 Print Setting for Analysis Data
In this area, print setting for analysis data is performed.
Since the function of each setting item is the same as in [1], “Print setting for measurement data,” only
the printing format of analysis data is shown in the figure below.
14. Frequency Analysis for Vibration Control
• Print list:
Analysis data included in the range specified in the “Setting for print list range” area is printed in the
format specified below.
Fig. 14.38 Printing Format of Analysis Data List
272
• Print data graph
The analysis data graph currently displayed in the “sampling” window is printed in the format specified
below.
Fig. 14.39 Printing Format of Analysis Data Graph
(Note) Different options can be selected in the “Print setting for measurement data” area and “Print setting
for analysis data” area, respectively.
[3] Print setting for FFT result data
Setting for print list range
Fig. 14.40 Print Setting for FFT Analysis Result Data
In this area, print setting for FFT analysis result data is performed.
The printing format of FFT analysis result data is shown in the figure on the next page.
The function of each setting item is the same as in [1], “Print setting for measurement data” and [2], “Print
setting for analysis data.”
The setting unit of fields in the “Setting for print list range” area is [Hz].
273
14. Frequency Analysis for Vibration Control
Print type selection
14. Frequency Analysis for Vibration Control
Fig. 14.41 Printing Format of FFT Result Data List
Fig. 14.42 Printing Format of FFT Result Data Graph
[4] Print/Close buttons
Clicking either button closes the print setting window.
If the Print button is clicked, data is printed based on the print setting options effective when the button
is clicked.
If the Close button is clicked, data is not printed.
274
14.3 Operating Procedure
Perform operations according to the procedure specified below.
(1) Select measurement data.
[1] Click the Parameter (P) menu, point to Control Parameter Setup (C), and then select Frequency
Analysis for Vibration Control (F).
[2] When the “measurement data selection” window appears, select the type of measurement data to be
imported in the “measurement data display/analysis details setting/analysis result display” window under
the frequency analysis for vibration control function.
(Note) [1] Import new controller data cannot be selected in SCON-CAL/CGAL.
Import measurement data externally taken by a measurement device by indicating [2] Read
external measurement data file. Have this data analyzed on FFT and set the vibration control
parameters.
[1] Import new controller data
[2] Read external measurement data file
[3] Read analytical already data file
Fig. 14.43 Measurement Data Selection (“Import New Controller Data” Selected)
In the “sampling” window or “FFT analysis result” window opened by the aforementioned step, save the
data type currently selected. This way, the saved data type will be automatically selected the next time
the “measurement data selection” window opens.
If “Import new controller data” is selected for the data type currently saved, but the PC software
connection status does not permit selection of “Import new controller data,” “Read external measurement
data file” will be selected.
(Note) The default value of “Import new controller data” is selected immediately after the PC software
has been installed.
275
14. Frequency Analysis for Vibration Control
[3] If “Import new controller data” has been selected, select the axis number under which to set the load
vibration frequency, and then click the OK button. If any other option has been selected, select the file to
be read and click the OK button, and the “frequency analysis for vibration control” window will appear. If
the Cancel button is clicked, the “frequency analysis for vibration control” window does not appear and
the “measurement data selection” window closes.
(Note) If “Read external measurement data file” or “Read analytical already data file” has been selected,
measurement data cannot be imported from the controller. If you want to import measurement
data from the controller, select “Import new controller data.”
(2) If “Import new controller data” has been selected, move the actuator to import analysis data.
[1] The “sampling” window (new controller data) appears.
14. Frequency Analysis for Vibration Control
[1] Tool buttons
[2] Sampling/FFT analysis result window switching
[3] FFT analysis setting
[4] Sampling setting
[5] Measurement data
[6] Data to be analyzed
Fig. 14.44 Sampling Window
[2] Under “Select data type” on the “Sampling” tab, select the data type you want to import during sampling.
Multiple data types can be selected.
[3] To start actuator operation simultaneously as sampling is started, select the “Link start drive” check box
on the “Sampling” tab and set the position numbers of two points between which the actuator will move
back and forth in the “Start No” and “End No” fields.
[4] Set the wait time in the “Wait time” field.
(Note) Steps [2] to [4] can be performed in any order.
276
[5] Clicking the Start button in the bottom left-hand corner of the window starts sampling.
While sampling is in progress, the display of the “sampling” window changes as shown below and the
measurement data graph gets updated continuously.
[6] When the maximum number of importable data have been sampled, sampling stops automatically.
To stop sampling at any point, click the Stop button.
277
14. Frequency Analysis for Vibration Control
Fig. 14.45 Sampling Window (Sampling in Progress)
(3) Perform FFT analysis.
Perform steps [1] to [6] in the sampling window. (Steps [1] to [4] can be performed in any order.)
[1] Set the analysis start time in the “FFT setting” area.
[2] Set the number of use data in the “FFT setting” area.
[3] Set the number of thinning in the “FFT setting” area.
[4] Set the window function in the “FFT setting” area.
[5] When all items in the “FFT setting” area have been set, click the Execute FFT button, and FFT analysis
will be performed.
The FFT result is displayed.
14. Frequency Analysis for Vibration Control
[1] FFT analysis result data
[2] Peak frequency setting
[4] Frequency resolution
[3] Maximum value of FFT
[6] Parameter set number selection
[5] Axis number selection
Fig. 14.46 FFT Analysis Result Win
278
[7] Forward to Controller button
(4) From the FFT result, select the setting of characteristic vibration frequency to be forwarded to the
controller as a parameter set value, and forward to the controller.
[1] Set the value you want to forward to the controller, in the “Peak Freq” field. Set the axis number and
parameter set number.
“Peak Freq” field
[2] Click the Forward to Controller button.
[3] When the data has been forwarded to the controller, a confirmation message appears, asking if you
want to restart the controller. Click the Yes (Y) button to restart the controller.
(Note) The values forwarded to the controller will not be reflected in the vibration control function unless
the controller is restarted.
279
14. Frequency Analysis for Vibration Control
Fig. 14.47 FFT Analysis Result Window
15.
Press Program Editing and Operation of Servo Press
(V10.00.00.00 or later for SCON-CB)
15.1 Operation Outline
Conduct the following steps to edit press program in the servo press.
[1] Select the press program number to show press program editing window. Press program editing window
can be selected from either of show detail window or simple display window which enables minimum
necessary settings. [Refer to 15.2.1 Press Program Editing Window]
Also, it is available to edit all press program at the same time in multi press program editing window *1.
*1 It is what the individual press programs (Press program No. 0 to 63) are all shown in table form at
once.
[2] Select from eight patterns of press motion modes in press program editing window.
[Refer to 15.2.1 Press Program Editing Window [1] (2) Press program Input for how to set up]
[Refer to SCON-CB controller instruction manual for each press motion mode]
15. Press Program Editing and Operation of Servo Press
(V10.00.00.00 or later for SCON-CB)
[Press Motion Mode]
1 : Speed control - Keeping Position
2 : Speed control - Keeping Distance
3 : Speed control - Holding Load
4 : Speed control - Holding Incremental Load
5 : Force control - Keeping Position
6 : Force control - Keeping Distance
7 : Force control - Holding Load
8 : Force control - Holding Incremental Load
9 : Force control - Keeping Position 2
[3] Select the items correspond to the press motion mode set in press program editing window.
[Refer to 15.2.1 Press Program Edit Window for how to set up]
[Refer to SCON-CB Controller Instruction Manual for Speed control, Force control, Keeping position,
Keeping Distance, Holding Load and Holding Incremental Load]
* The position can be read in by aligning the position of the rod in Trial Operation Window in the press
program operation / monitor and returning to Press Program Editing Window. Right-click on the item to
set the point for the end position (mm) of Approach Motion to read it in.
[Refer to 15.2.3 Press Program Operation / Monitor Window [2] Operation]
* By setting Continuous Prg. No. in press program editing window, continuous operation such as the
two-step pressing can be conducted.
[Refer to 15.2.1 Press Program Editing Window]
280
[4] Check the operation by setting Start Prg. No. operated in press program operation window in the press
program operation / monitor to move.
[Refer to 15.2.3 Press Program Operation / Monitor Window [2] Operation]
* Adjust the force gain in Gain Set No. by considering the hardness of an object to be pressed.
[Refer to SCON-CB controller instruction manual for the force gain]
[Refer to 8. Editing Parameters for how to set up parameters]
* Items such as Current Load Feedback (N) and Overload Level (%) can be checked in the axis status.
[Refer to 15.2.3 Press Program Operation / Monitor Window [3] Axis Status]
* Check current value and others in the servo monitor if necessary.
[Refer to 15.2.3 Press Program Operation / Monitor Window [4] Monitor]
Settings in the PC software is complete.
Have a trial operation with commands from the host controller such as PLC.
15. Press Program Editing and Operation of Servo Press
(V10.00.00.00 or later for SCON-CB)
281
15.2 Outline of Operation in Each Window
15.2.1 Press Program Editing Window
It is a window to set and edit the servo press operation.
[1] Either select Press Program (R) → Edit (E) from the menu in main window or click on
button on the
toolbar in main window to show a window to select either of press program editing window or the multi
press program editing window. It can also be started from the tree view.
Fig. 15.1 Select Press Program Window
15. Press Program Editing and Operation of Servo Press
(V10.00.00.00 or later for SCON-CB)
[2] Choose select press program, and select a press program number (0 to 63).
Click OK.
Simple display window in pres program editing window appears.
(Note) Setting in application setting window can make show detail window show up from the beginning.
[Refer to sections related to the servo press in 15.3 Servo Press Related in Application Setting
Window]
Fig. 15.2 Simple Display Window in Press Program Editing Window
282
[3] Click on
button to set or edit the press program in show details window.
Show details window appears.
Fig. 15.3 Show Details Window in Press Program Editing Window
15. Press Program Editing and Operation of Servo Press
(V10.00.00.00 or later for SCON-CB)
283
[1] Show Details Window in Press Program Editing Window
It is a window that enables detailed setting and editing of the servo press operation.
(1) Toolbar
(2) Press Program Input Part
Comment Display Area
(3) Statusbar
Fig. 15.4 Show Details Window in Press Program Editing Window
15. Press Program Editing and Operation of Servo Press
(V10.00.00.00 or later for SCON-CB)
(1) Toolbar
[1] [2] [3] [4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
Fig. 15.5 Toolbar in Press Program Editing Window
[1] Save
[2] Transfer
[3] Update
[4] Printout
[5] Display switchover
[6] Prg comment
: It saves data to a file.
: It transfers (writes) the data to a controller.
: It updates the data display after reading out a press program from a
controller again.
: It makes an output of a press program to a printer.
: It switches over the display of the editing window between Simple
Display and show details.
: It shows the editing window for Prg comment.
Input a comment and click OK, and a comment shows up in “ ” in
the comment display area.
Fig. 15.6 Prg Comment Input Window
284
[7] Continuous consolidated list : The continuous consolidated list for the press programs is displayed.
Select a press program number in searching program files, put a check mark by clicking on □ in Show,
and only those related to the selected press program numbers are shown.
[Explanation of Displayed Contents]
 P **
: Program No.
 (T *** *.)
: Prg No of standby time
(The time set in Wait Time in the press program input part)
 R -> P **
: Return Prg No.
For example, as Start Point Prg. No. 2 in the figure does, if 2 is set in
Consolidated Prg. No. at Last Point Prg. No. 4 so it returns to No. 2, R -> P02
will be displayed.
As Start Point Prg. No. 0 does, if None is set in Consolidated Prg. No. at Later
Prg. No. 1, because the press program does not return, R -> P*** will not be
displayed.
Fig. 15.7 Continuous Consolidated List Display
15. Press Program Editing and Operation of Servo Press
(V10.00.00.00 or later for SCON-CB)
285
(2) Press Program Input Part
[Refer to SCON-CB instruction manual for the contents of settings in each item of each press motion
mode]
* Right-click on a value of where the unit is [mm], such as distance upper limit [mm], read in Current
Position (T) button appears. Click on read in Current Position (T) button and current position can be
read in.
Axis movement by JOG / Inching can be conducted in Press Program Operation / Monitor Window.
[Refer to 15.2.3 Press Program Operation / Monitor Window]
[1]
[2]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[14]
[18]
[15]
[19]
[16]
[17]
Fig. 15.8 Press Program Input Part in Press Program Editing Window
15. Press Program Editing and Operation of Servo Press
(V10.00.00.00 or later for SCON-CB)
[11]
[12]
[13]
[1] Press motion mode : It switches over the press motion modes.
1 : Speed control - Keeping Position
2 : Speed control - Keeping Distance
3 : Speed control - Holding Load
4 : Speed control - Holding Incremental Load
5 : Force control - Keeping Position
6 : Force control - Keeping Distance
7 : Force control - Holding Load
8 : Force control - Holding Incremental Load
9 : Force control - Keeping Position 2
286
*
Speed control : It is a control to perform pressing with the pressing speed kept constant.
Positioning should be performed to the set position.
Therefore, the position after pressing completed is constant, but the pressing force may not be
constant.
* Force control : It is a control to perform pressing with the pressing force kept constant to achieve
the target load.
Pressing operation should be continued at stop. The pressing force after pressing completed is
constant, but the position may not be constant.
[Refer to SCON-CB instruction manual for the contents in each item of each press motion mode]
[2] Prg home position:
[3] Position. decision type :
287
15. Press Program Editing and Operation of Servo Press
(V10.00.00.00 or later for SCON-CB)
Set the start position for a press program.
Judgment can be made with the position (distance) and the
load during a stop after pressing stage completed.
For the position (distance) judgment, select whether to have the
position judgment or distance judgment.
[4] Position upper limit distance : Set the upper limit and lower limit for the judgment range for the
[5] Position lower limit distance
position (distance) judgment.
Setting Range : + soft limit ~ - soft limit
[6] Load upper limit :
Set the upper limit and lower limit for the judgment range for the
[7] Load lower limit
load judgment.
Setting Range : 0.01 ~ Maximum pressing force
[8] Return movement of Press Prg alarm :
Select whether to return to the home position of the program
and turn the servo OFF or stop at the position without returning
to the home position and turn the servo OFF in case of press
Prg. alarm being issued.
[9] Continuous Prg No. :
Set the press program numbers to execute continuously.
[Refer to SCON-CB controller instruction manual for how to
consolidate the press programs]
[10] Gain Set No. :
Indicate the gain set number to be used from the four types of
servo-motor gain registered in advance. The gain set can be
switched over for each press program.
[11] Wait time :
Set the wait time after a press program is finished will executing
another.
[12] Allowed Prg operating time : Set the execution time for the whole press programs.
[13] Acceleration and deceleration : Set the acceleration and deceleration in actuator operation in a
press program if [14] Show acceleration and deceleration
Individually is not pressed. All the operation in the press
program is performed with the acceleration and deceleration
set here.
15. Press Program Editing and Operation of Servo Press
(V10.00.00.00 or later for SCON-CB)
[14] Show Acceleration and deceleration individually :
Press Show acceleration and deceleration individually, and the acceleration and deceleration
settings in each operation in a press program can be established.
[15] Approach motion :
Approach motion can be set.
Approach motion is an operation to approach a work piece from
the press program home position till a point before touching the
work piece.
Approach motion will not be performed if a check mark is
removed.
[Refer to SCON-CB controller instruction manual for how to set
up Approach motion]
[16] Work search :
Work search can be set.
Work search is an operation to confirm the touch to a work
piece in low speed.
Search motion will not be performed if a check mark is
removed.
[Refer to SCON-CB controller instruction manual for how to set
up Work Search
[17] Press motion :
Press motion can be set.
Press motion is an operation to perform pressing under the
specified conditions.
There are some cases that the names for the setting items may
differ depending on the press motion mode.
[Refer to SCON-CB controller instruction manual for how to set
up Press motion]
[18] Depression operation :
Depression Operation can be set.
Depression Operation is an operation to move away from a
work piece in low speed.
Depression operation will not be performed if a check mark is
removed.
[Refer to SCON-CB controller instruction manual for how to set
up depression operation]
[19] Return movement :
Return movement can be set.
Return movement is an operation to move away from a work
piece in high speed and return to Prg. home position.
Return movement will not be performed if a check mark is
removed.
[Refer to SCON-CB controller instruction manual for how to set
up return movement]
(3) Statusbar
[1]
[3]
[2]
Fig. 15.9 Statusbar
[1] Modified or not : “Modified” is shown if any change has been made. “Not Modified” is shown if
no change has been made.
[2] Input Range
: The input range of an item that the cursor is placed on is displayed.
[3] Initial Value
: The initial value of an item that the cursor is placed on is displayed.
288
15.2.2 Multi Press Program Editing Window
It is a window to set and edit all the operations of the servo press in the individual press programs (No. 0 to 63)
at once.
It is displayed if All Press Programs is selected in the press program select.
Fig. 15.10 Multi Press program Editing Window
15. Press Program Editing and Operation of Servo Press
(V10.00.00.00 or later for SCON-CB)
289
15.2.3 Press Program Operation / Monitor Window
Check of axis status (I/O, network setting, current position, current speed, press program status, etc.), teaching,
trial operation, execution of servo monitor and display of results can be conducted.
Either select Press Program (R) → Operation / Monitor (Z) from the menu in Main Window or click on
button on the toolbar in Main Window, and Press Program Operation / Monitor Window appears.
It can also be started from the tree view.
[1] Toolbar
[2] Operation
[4] Monitor
15. Press Program Editing and Operation of Servo Press
(V10.00.00.00 or later for SCON-CB)
Fig. 15.11 Press Program Operation / Monitor Window
[5] I/O Monitor
[3] Axis Status
290
[1] Toolbar
[1] [2]
[3]
[4]
[6]
[5]
[7]
[8]
Fig. 15.12 Toolbar in Press Program Operation / Monitor Window
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
Edit Press program :
Network :
I/O monitor :
DO Output Test:
Edit press program window gets shown in another window.
Network status gets displayed.
To show / hide input and output ports is switched over.
DO output test window gets shown in another window.
[Refer to 9.1 Status Monitor Window for DO output test window]
Alarm :
Alarm codes get displayed. “000” is shown when no alarm is
issued.
Emergency stop / Motor voltage drop :
It gets displayed at emergency stop or motor voltage drop.
MANU/AUTO :
The status of the MANU (manual) / AUTO (auto) gets displayed.
Network (link) :
The status of the network link gets displayed.
15. Press Program Editing and Operation of Servo Press
(V10.00.00.00 or later for SCON-CB)
291
[2] Operation
There are two types, Prg. operation and Trial operation. Change the window on the tabs.
(1) Prg operation
In Prg. operation, prepare for press program and execute it.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[8]
[7]
[11]
[9]
[10]
[12]
[13]
Fig. 15.13 Prg Operation Window
[1] Servo :
[2] Home position :
[3] Alarm :
15. Press Program Editing and Operation of Servo Press
(V10.00.00.00 or later for SCON-CB)
[4] Press Prg alarm :
[5] Press Prg alarm detail :
[6] Start Prg No.:
[7] Prg Home position :
[8] Work search stop :
[9] Programs execution :
[10] Program stop :
[11] Excutive Prg No. display :
[12] Press motion mode display :
Servo can be turned ON/OFF.
Home-return operation can be held.
Alarm status can be released. Note that it can be released
only when the cause of the alarm is already solved.
The press program alarm codes get displayed.
[Refer to SCON-CB controller instruction manual for the
alarm codes]
Contents of the press program alarms get displayed.
The start press program is to be set up.
It enables to move to Prg. Home Positon.
button to execute a
Press this before pressing
program when it is required to finish the program at work
search operation. Execute the program and it stops at work
search stop.
A program can be executed from the press program set in
start program number. Once the program is finished in the
normal condition, the result of position (distance) judgment
and Load Judgment gets shown in [13] Judgment display.
It will not be shown when judgment is invalid.
The press program being executed can be stopped.
Prg. No. being executed gets displayed.
In the right column, the stage being executed, such as
Approach, gets displayed.
The press motion mode being executed, such as Speed
Control – Keeping Position, gets displayed.
292
[13] Judgment display :
The result of Position (distance) judgment and Load
Judgment gets displayed.
Also, from the result of position (distance) and load, the
result of comprehensive judgment gets displayed.
[Refer to SCON-CB Controller Instruction Manual for the
judgment]
15. Press Program Editing and Operation of Servo Press
(V10.00.00.00 or later for SCON-CB)
293
(2) Trial Operation
In Trial operation, axis movement by JOG and Inching and direct position move by indicating a
position can be conducted. The position that the movement was made to can be read in by
pressing Edit Press Program Button and opening edit press program window in another
window.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[9]
[7]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[8]
Fig. 15.14 Trial Operation Window
[1] Servo :
[2] Home position :
[3] Alarm :
15. Press Program Editing and Operation of Servo Press
(V10.00.00.00 or later for SCON-CB)
[4] Press Prg alarm :
[5] Press Prg alarm detail :
[6] JOG Key :
[7] JOG Select :
[8] Inching Select :
[9]
Direct position move execution :
Servo can be turned ON/OFF.
Home-return operation can be held.
Alarm status can be released. Note that it can be released
only when the cause of the alarm is already solved.
The press program alarm codes get displayed.
[Refer to SCON-CB controller instruction manual for the
alarm codes]
Contents of the press program alarms get displayed.
Axis can be moved with JOG and Inching.
JOG operation can be held by selecting JOG.
JOG speed setting can be held.
Inching operation can be held by selecting Inching.
Setting of Inching distance can be conducted.
With the speed set in [12] Speed, moves to the position set
in [11] Position.
[10] Direct position move stop :
An axis in move can be stopped.
[11] Direct position move setting : The position for direct position move can be set.
[12] Direct position move speed specified :
The speed for direct position move can be set.
294
[3] Axis Status
The current status of an axis gets displayed.
The following items are shown.
• Current position [mm]
• Current speed [mm/s]
• Current load [N] (Note 1)
• Calibration (Note 1) : Complete / Incomplete
• Overload level [%]
• Command current ratio [%]
• Feedback current ratio [%]
Note 1 When the load cell is inactivated, “inactive” is displayed.
Fig. 15.15 Axis Status Window
15. Press Program Editing and Operation of Servo Press
(V10.00.00.00 or later for SCON-CB)
295
[4] Monitor
The status of an axis gets shown in the monitoring display. The following four items can be
monitored.
• Current position [mm]
• Current load [N]
• Feedback current ratio [%] (Note 1)
• Current speed [mm/s] (Note 1)
Note 1 It is available to change to another item.
[4] [5] [6]
[7]
[8]
[1] [2] [3]
[9]
[10]
15. Press Program Editing and Operation of Servo Press
(V10.00.00.00 or later for SCON-CB)
Fig. 15.16 Monitor Window
[1]
[2]
[3]
Save :
Monitoring setting :
Detail monitor :
Monitor Data can be saved.
Monitoring Setting Window gets displayed. [Refer to next page]
Servo Monitor Result Displayed Window gets displayed. [Refer to [6]
Servo Monitor Result Window]
[4] Trigger start :
Monitoring starts with the set trigger.
Trigger setting can be held in Monitoring Setting Window.
[Refer to next page]
[5] Start :
Monitoring gets started.
[6] Stop :
Monitoring gets stopped.
[7] Linked with Prg. :
The start of monitoring and start of a program get linked with each
other.
[8] Legend Display / Hide Select :
Click in □ to put a check mark, and a legend for [9] gets displayed.
Click again to remove the check mark, and the legend for [9] gets
hidden.
[9] Legend Display :
The line colors and their titles in the graph get displayed.
[10] Monitoring Window : Monitoring data gets updated and displayed.
The number of records available to monitor is 30000.
296
(1) Monitoring setting
in monitoring window is pressed.
It gets displayed if Monitoring Setting Button
Setting for displayed items in each channel, sampling period setting and trigger setting to be held
in monitoring can be conducted.
[3]
[1]
[2]
Fig. 15.17 Monitoring Setting Window
[1] Channel setting :
[2] Sampling period setting :
[3] Trigger setting :
Monitoring items can be set. CH1 and CH2 cannot be changed.
Sampling period setting in monitoring can be changed.
The settable value should be from 1msec to 1000msec.
Conditions for trigger start can be set.
[Refer in the next page for how to set up]
15. Press Program Editing and Operation of Servo Press
(V10.00.00.00 or later for SCON-CB)
297
[Trigger Setting]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
15. Press Program Editing and Operation of Servo Press
(V10.00.00.00 or later for SCON-CB)
Fig. 15.18 Monitoring Setting Window (Trigger Setting)
[1] Data types
The following data types can be selected.
• PIO signal (input) allocation (bit)
• PIO signal (output) allocation (bit)
• Clock
[2] Trigger Type
When PIO feature input assignment (bit) or PIO feature output assignment (bit) is selected, select
either Rising edge (bit) or Falling edge (bit).
It is not necessary to select any if Clock is selected.
[3] Assign Signals
When PIO feature input assignment (bit) is selected, select from the PIO input port signals. When
PIO feature output assignment (bit) is selected, select from the PIO output port signals.
It is not necessary to select any if Clock is selected.
[4] Data
When Clock is selected, the current time in the controller is shown first. With that time as the
standard, set the time that trigger is required at.
For example, if you would like to trigger in one minute, forward the minute setting for one minute.
[5] Trigger delay [sec]
In case that the data before having a trigger is required to be acquired, set the time [sec] in Trigger
Delay [sec]. It enables to acquire the data before the time of trigger being conducted.
298
[5] I/O Monitor
Status of input ports, output ports and special input ports get displayed.
[1]
[2]
[3]
Fig. 15.19 Ports Input and Output Window
[1] Input Ports :
[2] Output Ports :
[3] Special Input Ports :
The status of being ON/OFF for the PIO input ports is displayed.
The status of being ON/OFF for the PIO output ports is displayed.
The status of being ON/OFF for the special input ports is displayed.
15. Press Program Editing and Operation of Servo Press
(V10.00.00.00 or later for SCON-CB)
299
[6] Servo Monitor Result Window
in Press Program Operation / Monitor Window, and the
Click on Detail Monitor Button
result of the executed monitoring can be confirmed in the dedicated result display window. Also,
servo monitor files already saved can be confirmed.
(1) Toolbar
(2) Channel Setting
(3) Sampling
Period Setting
(4) Linked with
program
Fig. 15.20 Servo Monitor Result Window
15. Press Program Editing and Operation of Servo Press
(V10.00.00.00 or later for SCON-CB)
(5) Trigger Setting
(1) Toolbar
[1] [2]
[4]
[3]
Fig. 15.21 Toolbar
[1] Save Prg File :
[2] Printout :
[3] Scale-up/down :
[4] Horizontal Axis Switchover :
Data and settings are saved in a file if the displayed data is
not from a file.
It makes an output of a monitoring result to a printer.
Display can be scaled up and down in each vertical direction
and horizontal direction.
The item to display on the horizontal axis can be selected
from Time and Position.
If it is switched over to Position, variation of force in each
position can be confirmed.
300
(2) Channel setting
Monitored items can be displayed / hidden for each channel.
Fig. 15.22 Displayed Channel Setting
(3) Sampling period setting
Sampling Period Setting gets displayed.
Fig. 15.23 Sampling period setting
(4) Linked with program
Status gets displayed if Monitoring Start and Program Start are linked with each other.
Fig. 15.24 Linked with Program
Fig. 15.25 Linked with Program
301
15. Press Program Editing and Operation of Servo Press
(V10.00.00.00 or later for SCON-CB)
(5) Trigger setting
Trigger Setting gets displayed in case of monitoring with Trigger Start.
15.3 Servo Press Related in Application Setting Window
Select [Setting] → [Application Setting] from the menu in main window.
Fig. 15.26 Application Setting
15. Press Program Editing and Operation of Servo Press
(V10.00.00.00 or later for SCON-CB)
The initial display type of Program Editing Window can be selected from Simple Display and
Show Details.
302
16.
Appendix
16.1 Parameter (Factory Default Setting) Initializing Method
Note: Parameters (factory default setting) can be initialized only for PCON, ACON, SCON, ERC2, ERC3,
ROBONET, ASEP, PSEP, DSEP, MSEP, MSCON and MCON controller.
Note: Note that parameters set by user are changed to the factory default parameters when parameters
(factory default setting) are initialized.
(1) Right click a blank part of the toolbar (Appendix Fig. 16.1) while pressing the Ctrl key, then input password
window as shown in Fig. 16.2 is displayed.
Fig. 16.1 Menu Bar
Right-click the blank part of
the tool bar while pressing Ctrl.
Fig. 16.2 Input Password Window
(2) Input the password (5119) on the displayed input password window, then the “Controller Initialization”
(factory default setting) menu is displayed (Fig. 16.3).
(Note) The password inputted once is effective until the application ends.
303
16. Appendix
Fig. 16.3 Menu Bar (Parameter Initialization (Factory Default Setting))
(3) When the menu “Controller Initialization” (factory default setting) displayed in (2) is selected, a dialog box
in appendix Fig. 16.4 is displayed. Click OK when one axis is connected. Set axis No. and click OK when
multiple axes are connected.
Fig. 16.4 Initialization Dialog Box
(4) Then, a warning dialog in Fig. 16.5 is displayed. If there is no problem, click Yes.
Fig. 16.5 Warning Windows
A warning dialog in Fig. 16.6 is further displayed when the servo is ON.
If there is no problem, click Yes.
16. Appendix
Fig. 16.6 Warning Window
Note: The encoder parameters cannot be initialized. For this reason, if any actuator different from the factory
default setting is connected, an unexpected error may be detected.
304
16.2 PC Software Error List
These errors are specific to the PC software.
For the controller errors, refer to the operation manual for each controller.
Code
Message
103 File write error
104
105
Entered value too small
Entered value too large
108
Teaching prohibited
before home return
10B
File open error (read)
10C
File open error (write)
10D
File read error
10E
111
119
The entered value is smaller than the setting range.
The entered value is larger than the setting range.
Refer to the actuator specification or parameter list and enter an
appropriate value again.
This error indicates that an attempt was made to write the current position
when home return was not yet complete.
Perform home return first.
This error indicates that the specified file could not be opened.
The following causes are considered:
 The specified file does not exist.
 The specified file is already opened in other application.
This error indicates that the destination file could not be opened.
The following causes are considered:
 The specified file is already opened in other application.
This error indicates that the file could not be read.
The following cause is considered:
 There is no enough memory to read the file.
File type error
This error indicates that an attempt was made to send parameter files or all
data backup files to a model different from the one which is the source of
the applicable files.
Incremental specification This error indicates that an attempt was made to write position data
function not supported
containing data of incremental specification to a model not supporting the
“incremental specification” function (move by relative position specification).
File data error
This error indicates that reading of a file failed.
The following cause is considered:
 The specified file contains invalid data.
Multiple axes detected
This error indicates that “axis number assignment” was attempted when
multiple axes were connected.
Always assign an axis number when only one axis is connected.
305
16. Appendix
10F
Description
This error indicates that writing of one of various data files (position data
files, parameter files, all data backup files, etc.) failed.
The following causes are considered:
 The file to be written is read only.
 The current login account of the OS has no permission to modify the
file.
Code
Message
11A No effective axis
122
123
124
16. Appendix
125
20C
20D
20E
211
Description
This error indicates that “axis number assignment” was attempted when no
axis was connected. Or, the axis number of controller may not have been
recognized.
Causes : [1] The controller is not operating properly.
[2] The signal wire (SGA/SGB), and only the signal wire, is broken
in the supplied cable.
[3] If a SIO converter is used, the link cable is not connected
although 24 V is supplied to the converter.
[4] If multiple controllers are linked, two ADRS switches are setting
the same number by mistake.
Actions : [1] Check if the RDY lamp on the controller is lit. If not, the controller
is faulty.
[2] If a spare connection cable is available, try swapping the cable to
see if the problem is resolved.
[3] Eliminate duplicate ADRS switch settings. If the problem still
persists, contact IAI.
Input data error
This error indicates that inappropriate data was entered. Check the entered
data.
Inconsistent data version This indicates that an attempt was made to send data which was saved on a
controller of an incompatible version.
Check the version of the source controller and that of the destination
controller.
Data editing prohibited in This error indicates that an attempt was made to write position data or
non-MANU teaching mode parameters to the controller in the AUTO mode or any MANU monitor mode.
The following causes are considered:
 The controller’s mode switch is set to “AUTO” (if the controller has a
mode switch).
 The PC software is in “MANU monitor mode 1” or MANU monitor mode
2.”
Axis operation prohibited in This error indicates that an attempt was made to perform axis operation
non-MANU teaching mode (jogging, home return of an operation-prohibited axis, continuous move, etc.)
in the AUTO mode or any MANU monitor mode.
The following causes are considered:
 The controller’s mode switch is set to “AUTO” (if the controller has a
mode switch).
 The PC software is in “MANU monitor mode 1” or “MANU monitor mode
2.”
Start signal ON
This error indicates that the start signal (CSTR) was turned ON by the PLC
while the actuator was moving, and duplication of move commands occurred
as a result.
STP signal OFF
This error indicates that the pause signal (*STP) was turned OFF by the PLC
while the actuator was moving, and the actuator became no longer movable
as a result.
Soft limit exceeded
This error indicates that a move command to outside the soft limit range was
issued while the actuator was moving.
HOME signal ON
This error indicates that the home return signal (HOME) was turned ON by
the PLC while the actuator was moving, and duplication of move commands
occurred as a result.
306
Code
Message
212 JOG signal ON
300
COM port open error
301
Receive timeout error
302
Receive buffer overflow
303
Receive overrun
304
Receive framing error
307
16. Appendix
Description
This error indicates that the jog signal (JOG) was turned ON by the PLC
while the actuator was moving, and duplication of move commands
occurred as a result.
This error indicates that the COM port specified in the “application of setting
window” could not be opened.
The following causes are considered:
 The specified COM port does not exist.
 The specified COM port is already used in other application, etc.
This error indicates that a receive timeout error occurred while the PC
software was communicating with the connected controller.
Causes : [1] Communication fault due to poor connection between the PC
and controller
[2] Communication fault due to noise (data turning into garbage,
etc.)
[3] The controller power was cut OFF.
Actions : [1] Check if the connectors on the PC-controller connection cable
are firmly connected.
[2] Readjust the wiring, equipment installation, etc., to eliminate
noise.
[3] Check if the controller power is supplied. If the problem still
persists, contact IAI.
This error indicates that the receive buffer overflowed when a response
message was received from the controller.
Causes : [1] Communication fault due to poor connection between the PC
and controller
[2] Communication fault due to noise (data turning into garbage,
etc.)
Actions : [1] Check if the connectors on the PC-controller connection cable
are firmly connected.
[2] Readjust the wiring, equipment installation, etc., to eliminate
noise. If the problem still persists, contact IAI.
This error indicates that a receive overrun occurred at the COM port on the
PC when a response message was received from the controller.
Select a lower baud rate in the “application of setting window.”
This error indicates that a receive framing error occurred when a response
message was received from the controller.
Causes : [1] Communication fault due to poor connection between the PC
and controller
[2] Communication fault due to noise (garbled data, etc.)
Actions : [1] Check if the connectors on the PC-controller connection cable
are firmly connected.
[2] Readjust the wiring, equipment installation, etc., to eliminate
noise.
If the problem still persists, contact IAI.
16. Appendix
Code
Message
305 Communication error
306
Checksum error
307
CRC error
308
Receive message error
310
Connected model not
supported
311
Baud rate specification
error (PC COM port)
Description
A communication error not specified above occurred when a response
message was received from the controller.
Causes : [1] Communication fault due to poor connection between the PC
and controller
[2] Communication fault due to noise (garbled data, etc.)
Actions : [1] Check if the connectors on the PC-controller connection cable
are firmly connected.
[2] Readjust the wiring, equipment installation, etc., to eliminate
noise.
If the problem still persists, contact IAI.
A checksum error occurred when a response message was received from
the controller.
Causes : [1] Communication fault due to poor connection between the PC
and controller
[2] Communication fault due to noise (garbled data, etc.)
Actions : [1] Check if the connectors on the PC-controller connection cable
are firmly connected.
[2] Readjust the wiring, equipment installation, etc., to eliminate
noise.
If the problem still persists, contact IAI.
A CRC error occurred when a response message was received from the
controller.
Causes : [1] Communication fault due to poor connection between the PC
and controller
[2] Communication fault due to noise (garbled data, etc.)
Actions : [1] Check if the connectors on the PC-controller connection cable
are firmly connected.
[2] Readjust the wiring, equipment installation, etc., to eliminate
noise.
If the problem still persists, contact IAI.
This error indicates that the response message from the controller contains
abnormal data.
Causes : [1] Communication fault due to poor connection between the PC
and controller
[2] Communication fault due to noise (garbled data, etc.)
Actions : [1] Check if the connectors on the PC-controller connection cable
are firmly connected.
[2] Readjust the wiring, equipment installation, etc., to eliminate
noise.
If the problem still persists, contact IAI.
This error indicates that connection of a model not supported by the PC
software was detected.
Check the version of the PC software and models supported by the
software.
This error indicates that the port could not be opened at the baud rate
specified in the “application of setting window.”
The following cause is considered:
 The specified baud rate is not supported by the COM port on the PC.
Change the baud rate to a supported setting.
308
17.
File Extensions
List of File Extensions
Position data file
Parameter file
*.ptr
*.pmr
*.ptr
*.prr
* pte
*.pre
*.ptr2
*.pmr2
*.ptre
*.pmre
*.ptre2
*.pmre2
*.ptre3
*.pmre3
*.ptpc
*.prpc
*.ptpa
*.prpa
*.ptac
*.prac
*.ptaa
*.praa
*.ptab
*.prab
Backup file
*.bkr
*.bur
*.bue
*.bkr2
*.bkre
*.bkre2
*.bkre3
*.bkpc
*.bkpa
*.bkac
*.bkaa
*.bkab
-
*.prabm
*.bkabm
*.ptacl
*.ptda
*.ptdb
*.pracl
*.prda
*.prdb
*.bkacl
*.bkda
*.bkdb
-
*.prdbm
*.bkdbm
*.ptdcl
*.ptsc
*.ptsa
*.prdcl
*.prsc
*.prsa
*.bkdcl
*.bksc
*.bksa
-
*.prsm
*.bksm
*.ptscl
*.ptsb
*.prscl
*.prsb
*.pkscl
*.bksb
-
*.prsbm
*.bksbm
*.ptas
*.ptps
*.ptds
*.pras
*.prps
*.prds
*.bkas
*.bkps
*.bkds
309
17. File Extensions
Model name
RCP
RCS
E-Con
RCP2
ERC
ERC2
ERC3
PCON, RPCON
PCON-CA
ACON, RACON
ACON-CA
ACON-CB/CGB
ACON-CB
(MECHATROLINK-Ⅲ:
with ML3 included in model code)
ACON-CYB, PLB, POB
DCON-CA
DCON-CB/CGB
DCON-CB
(MECHATROLINK-Ⅲ:
with ML3 included in model code)
DCON-CYB, PLB, POB
SCON-C
SCON-CA
SCON-CA
(MECHATROLINK-Ⅲ:
with ML3 included in model code)
SCON-CAL/CGAL
SCON-CB
SCON-CB
(MECHATROLINK-Ⅲ:
with ML3 included in model code)
ASEP
PSEP
DSEP
17. File Extensions
Model name
PCON-CB/CGB/CFB/CGFB
PCON-CYB, PLB, POB
RCP6S
RCM-P6PC
RCM-P6AC
RCM-P6DC
MSEP
(with D included in model code)
MSEP
(with T included in model code)
MSCON
MCON
(Servo Motor)
MCON
(Pulse Motor)
MCON
(Brushless DC Motor)
MCON
(with T included in model code)
MCON (Servo Motor)
(MECHATROLINK-Ⅲ:
with ML3 included in model code)
(SSCNETⅢ/H :
with SSC included in model code)
(EtherCat Motion :
with ECM included in model code)
MCON (Pulse Motor)
(MECHATROLINK-Ⅲ:
with ML3 included in model code)
(SSCNETⅢ/H :
with SSC included in model code)
(EtherCat Motion :
with ECM included in model code)
MCON (Brushless DC Motor)
(MECHATROLINK-Ⅲ:
with ML3 included in model code)
(SSCNETⅢ/H :
with SSC included in model code)
(EtherCat Motion :
with ECM included in model code)
ELECYLINDER
Position data file
*.ptpb
*.ptpcl
*.ptp6
*.ptp6pc
*.ptp6ac
*.ptp6dc
Parameter file
*.ptpb
*.prpcl
*.prp6
*.prp6pc
*.prp6ac
*.prp6dc
Backup file
*.ptpb
*.bkpcl
*.bkp6
*.bkp6pc
*.bkp6ac
*.bkp6dc
*.ptmd
*.prmd
*.pkmd
*.ptmp2
*.prmp2
*.pkmp2
*.ptms
*.prms
*.bkms
*.ptmac
*.prmac
*.bkmac
*.ptmpc
*.prmpc
*.bkmpc
*.ptmdc
*.prmdc
*.bkmdc
*.ptmpc
*.prmpc
*.bkmpc
-
*.prmacm
*.bkmacm
-
*.prmpcm
*.bkmpcm
-
*.prmdcm
*.bkmdcm
*.ptec
*.prec
*.bkec
Model name
SCON-CB
(Servo Motor)
(with F included in model code)
Position data file
Parameter file
Backup file
*.prg
*.prsbf
*.bksbf
310
18.
Change History
Revision Date
December 2009
February 2010
August 2011
Description of Revision
Added descriptions of ASEP/PSEP controller operations.
Change the default system password from “5119” to “0000.”
Sixth edition
Change in software license agreement
September 2011
Seventh edition
P39
Added the PCON-CA position window.
P58
Added PCON-CA in (8), “Position data input area”
P97
Added the PCON-CA alarm display window.
P101 to 104 Added 8.4, “Servo Monitor Window.”
P105
8.5, “Maintenance Information Window”
P109, 110
Added 9.3, “Time Setting.”
P112 to 158 Added 11, “Smart Tuning Function”
P159
Added PCON-CA to 12, “File Extensions.”
September 2011
Eighth edition
P111 to 156 Contents changed in 11, Smart Tuning Function
September 2011
Ninth edition
The contents of ERC3 are added
October 2011
November 2011
January 2012
June 2012
Eleventh edition
The contents of SCON-CA are added
Twelfth edition
• Caution, Operational Environment and Applicable for Windows Vista and Windows
7 are added
• Instruction how to install driver to Windows 7 and Windows Vista added to
instructions to install USB conversion adapter
• MSEP added
Thirteenth edition
Change in how to install Windows 7 and Windows Vista.
Fourteenth edition
MSCON added
April 2013
Fifteenth edition
[3] “Appearance of Process to Test run Plan Display” deleted from (2) “Test run result”
in 11.4.3 “Explanation of Takt Time Calculation Window”
July 2013
Sixteenth Edition
P35 and 117
MSEP and MSCON deleted from clock setting section.
311
18. Change History
August 2012
Tenth edition
DSEP added
Revision Date
October 2013
Seventeenth Edition
P35
Note corrected
Password 5119 → Password 6451
October 2013
Eighteenth Edition
The contents of ACON-CA and DCON-CA added
“Takt Time” changed to “Cycle Time” in 11. “Smart Tuning (Version V8.03.00.00 and
later)” and 12. “Offboard Tuning Function on SCON-CA and MSCON Controller”
March 2014
May 2014
Nineteenth Edition
MSEP (with 3D or T included in model code) and MSEP-LC added to supported
model
Twentieth Edition
P112
Correction made to contents of maintenance information
August 2014
Twenty-first Edition
The contents of SCON-CAL/CGAL added
October 2014
Twenty-second Edition
P35
Password for “Actuator Replacement” changed from 6451 to 5119
P112
Correction made on total operation distance in Maintenance Window to
available to change between km and m
January 2015
Twenty-third Edition
A Word of Caution, P2 Windows 8, 8.1 added
Windows 2000 deleted
February 2015
Twenty-fourth Edition
P20 to P23
Installation procedure of USB conversion adapter changed for
Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows 8 and 8.1
October 2015
Twenty-fifth Edition
SCON-CB, ACON-CB, DCON-CB and MCON Controllers added
15. Press Program Editing and Operation of Servo Press added
February 2016
Twenty-sixth Edition
PCON-CB Controllers added
March 2016
18. Change History
Description of Revision
April 2016
Twenty-seventh Edition
PCON-CYB/PLB/POB, ACON-CYB/PLB/POB and DCON-CYB/PLB/POB are added
to the supported models.
P34 to P37
I/O customize” is added
P115
The contents of PCON-CYB/PLB/POB, ACON-CYB/PLB/POB and
DCON-CYB/PLB/POB are added.
P285 to P286 File extensions for PCON-CYB/PLB/POB, ACON-CYB/PLB/POB and
DCON-CYB/PLB/POB are added.
27B Edition
P36 to P37
P59 to P60
Delete the CSTR and PEND from the table
Table to PCON-CYB, ACON-CYB and DCON-CYB added
312
Revision Date
Description of Revision
June 2016
27C Edition
Supported Models Applicable versions added for MECHATROLINK-Ⅲ of MCON
and SSCNETⅢ/H
P115
The monitoring period of ACON-CA, DCON-CA, PCON-CA,
ERC3, SCON-CA, MSCON, SCON-CB changed.
1 to 100 [msec] → 1 to 1,000 [msec]
File Extensions
P286
MECHATROLINK-Ⅲ of MCON and SSCNETⅢ/H added
July 2016
27D Edition
P256, P262
July 2016
27E Edition
P40
P107
September 2016
9 : Force control - Keeping Position 2 added
Contents added for pairing I.D. clear
Explanation added for status display for network link in the status
monitor window
Twenty-eighth Edition
A Word of Caution P2
P20
October 2016
28B Edition
P40
November 2016
28C Edition
P34, P35
Windows 10 added
Windows 7, Windows Vista, deleted
Windows 10 added
Note added to state loadcell gets activated if rebooted with such
as software reset
8.6 Gateway Data Unit and 8.7 Network Data Monitor added
The contents of SCON Parameter Converter Tool added
April 2017
Twenty-ninth Edition
Became applicable for ELECYLINDER
Became applicable for MCON-C/CG EtherCAT Motion
June 2017
29B Edition
Supported Models, 17. File Extensions
RCM-P6PC, RCM-P6AC and RCM-P6DC added
August 2017
29C Edition
P57
Note added stating MCON Controller is not applicable
18. Change History
313
Manual No.: ME0155-29C (August 2017)
Head Office: 577-1 Obane Shimizu-KU Shizuoka City Shizuoka 424-0103, Japan
TEL +81-54-364-5105 FAX +81-54-364-2589
website: www.iai-robot.co.jp/
Technical Support available in USA, Europe and China
Head Office: 2690 W. 237th Street, Torrance, CA 90505
TEL (310) 891-6015 FAX (310) 891-0815
Chicago Office: 110 East State Parkway, Schaumburg, IL 60173
TEL (847) 908-1400 FAX (847) 908-1399
Atlanta Office: 1220 Kennestone Circle, Suite 108, Marietta, GA 30066
TEL (678) 354-9470 FAX (678) 354-9471
website: www.intelligentactuator.com
Ober der Röth 4, D-65824 Schwalbach am Taunus, Germany
TEL 06196-88950 FAX 06196-889524
SHANGHAI JIAHUA BUSINESS CENTER A8-303, 808, Hongqiao Rd. Shanghai 200030, China
TEL 021-6448-4753 FAX 021-6448-3992
website: www.iai-robot.com
825 PhairojKijja Tower 12th Floor, Bangna-Trad RD., Bangna, Bangna, Bangkok 10260, Thailand
TEL +66-2-361-4458 FAX +66-2-361-4456
The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice for purposes of
product improvement.
Copyright © 2017. Aug. IAI Corporation. All rights reserved.
17.08.000
Download PDF

advertising